JP6543018B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention variably displays a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each of the plurality of types of identification information that can be identified based on the establishment of the start condition after the game medium passes through the start area provided in the game area. The present invention relates to a gaming machine which controls the display unit to a specific gaming state which is advantageous for the player when the predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed.

  As a game machine, when a game ball is shot into a game area by a launch device as a game medium, and the game ball wins in a prize area such as a prize port provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player There is one that has been configured. Furthermore, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as "variation display" or simply "variation") is provided, and the display result of the variable display of identification information in the variable display unit becomes the specific display result There are those configured to give a predetermined gaming value to the player.

  The prize value is to pay out a prize ball or to give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball to the prize area. In addition, with the game value, when the specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine is in an advantageous state for the player who is easy to hit the ball, It is to generate the right to be in an advantageous state, and to be in a state where it becomes easy to establish the conditions for award ball payout.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, the game ball is won in the start winning opening (starting area), and the display of the special symbol (identification information) is started on the variable display unit based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition. When a predetermined specific display mode (specific display result) is derived and displayed, a "big hit (specific game state)" occurs. In addition, derivation | leading-out display is making a symbol stop display. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a transition is made to a big hit gaming state in which a hit ball tends to be won. Then, in each open period, when there is a winning to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings, the large winning openings are closed. The number of opening of the special winning opening is fixed at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). Note that an open time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each open, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the open time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In such a pachinko gaming machine, variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, effect pattern) capable of identifying each can be changed to a plurality of variable display areas (for example, left symbol display area of effect display device, middle symbol display area, right When a combination of identification information displayed in the plurality of variable display areas is a predetermined specific combination (for example, 777), a big hit occurs. As such a pachinko gaming machine, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine which gives notice of advance notice stop symbol (for example, 777) in the variation at the start of variation of the rendering symbol.

JP-A-2002-85713 (FIGS. 11 to 16)

  The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is not possible to increase the sense of expectation for the stop symbol prior to the start of fluctuation of the identification information.

  Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the sense of expectation for the stop pattern before the start of fluctuation of identification information.

(Means 1) The gaming machine of Means 1
In the case where the start condition (for example, the number of stored memories is not 0) after the game medium (for example, the game ball) passes through the start area (for example, the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14) provided in the game area And the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not being executed, and a plurality of types of identification information (based on the state where the big hit game is not executed) are established. For example, variable display (for example, variation display of effect symbols) of 1 to 9 effect symbols is performed in a plurality of variable display areas (for example, left symbol display area 9L, middle symbol display area 9C, right symbol display area 9R) When the combination of identification information displayed in the plurality of variable display areas results in a predetermined specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol), an advantageous state (for example, large) advantageous for the player Ri a gaming machine to control the game state),
Hold storage means (for example, a first one) that can store data (for example, a jackpot determination random number) for determining whether to set the specific display result when game media passes through the start area. Storage buffer and second storage buffer),
At least one of the plurality of variable display areas at a specific timing (for example, reach state formation timing or temporary stop timing) during variable display (for example, during variable display serving as a target of symbol pre-reading effect) corresponding to the storage pending The identification information displayed in the variable display area of the variable display area before the variable display corresponding to the hold storage (for example, the variable display corresponding to the hold storage (hold display) serving as the target of the symbol pre-reading effect) is started Performs suggested suggestion effects (for example, executes the symbol pre-reading effect setting process (S67105e in FIG. 28) at the start winning combination to determine the final display mode and reach pattern (S67206 and S67207a in FIG. 30), and then determines in S67208 Perform the effect of changing the display mode of the target's hold display to the symbol notice mode at the specified timing ),
After the suggestion effect is performed and before the variable display corresponding to the retention memory of the suggestion object of the suggestion effect is started , the aspect of the suggestion effect is displayed without fluctuating the indication effect. der possible to change the identification information indicated by the indicating effect by altering is,
The mode of the indication effect includes the special mode which suggests both that the display mode of the variable display becomes the reach mode and that the re-variable display is performed in which the variable display is performed again after temporary stop of the variable display. ,
It is possible to execute a notice effect for giving notice that the identification information suggested by the indication effect is changed, and when the notice effect is executed in the first mode, the notice effect is executed in the second mode From time to time, it is characterized in that the rate at which the identification information suggested by the suggestion effect is changed is different .
According to this, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the identification information displayed in the variable display area at the specific timing during the variable display before the variable display corresponding to the pending storage is started. Become.

(Means 2) The gaming machine of Means 2
In the case where the start condition (for example, the number of stored memories is not 0) after the game medium (for example, the game ball) passes through the start area (for example, the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14) provided in the game area And the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not being executed, and a plurality of normal identification information based on the fact that the big hit game is not being executed). Variable display (for example, 1 to 9 effect symbols) (for example, fluctuation display of effect symbols) in a plurality of variable display areas (for example, left symbol display area 9L, middle symbol display area 9C, right symbol display area 9R) When the combination of the normal identification information displayed in the plurality of variable display areas is a predetermined specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol), an advantageous state (eg, an advantageous state for the player) If, a gaming machine to control the jackpot gaming state),
The game machine further comprises a hold storage unit capable of storing data (for example, a random number for determining a big hit) as a hold storage for determining whether or not to set the specific display result when game media passes through the start area.
In the at least one variable display area of the plurality of variable display areas, any one of identification information including the normal identification information and special identification information (for example, pseudo run symbol) different from the normal identification information is displayed ,
At least one of the plurality of variable display areas at a specific timing (for example, reach state formation timing or temporary stop timing) during variable display (for example, during variable display serving as a target of symbol pre-reading effect) corresponding to the storage pending The identification information displayed in the variable display area of the variable display area before the variable display corresponding to the hold storage (for example, the variable display corresponding to the hold storage (hold display) serving as the target of the symbol pre-reading effect) is started Performs suggested suggestion effects (for example, executes the symbol pre-reading effect setting process (S67105e in FIG. 28) at the start winning combination to determine the final display mode and reach pattern (S67206 and S67207a in FIG. 30), and then determines in S67208 Perform the effect of changing the display mode of the target's hold display to the symbol notice mode at the specified timing ),
After the suggestion effect is performed and before the variable display corresponding to the retention memory of the suggestion object of the suggestion effect is started , the aspect of the suggestion effect is displayed without fluctuating the indication effect. der possible to change the identification information indicated by the indicating effect by altering is,
The mode of the indication effect includes the special mode which suggests both that the display mode of the variable display becomes the reach mode and that the re-variable display is performed in which the variable display is performed again after temporary stop of the variable display. ,
It is possible to execute a notice effect for giving notice that the identification information suggested by the indication effect is changed, and when the notice effect is executed in the first mode, the notice effect is executed in the second mode From time to time, it is characterized in that the rate at which the identification information suggested by the suggestion effect is changed is different .
According to this, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the identification information displayed in the variable display area at the specific timing during the variable display before the variable display corresponding to the pending storage is started. Become. The identification information includes normal identification information variably displayed in the variable display area, and special identification information different from the normal identification information .

(Means 3) The gaming machine of Means 3
A gaming machine of means 1 or 2;
The information processing apparatus further comprises a holding information display unit (for example, a total holding storage display unit 18c) capable of displaying holding information corresponding to the holding storage,
In the indication effect, the plurality of variable display areas at a specific timing during the variable display according to the mode of the suspension information corresponding to the variable display (for example, the variable display to be the target of the symbol pre-reading effect) Suggesting identification information to be displayed in at least one of the variable display areas of
It is characterized by
According to this, it becomes possible for the player to easily grasp the correspondence between the hold information and the identification information suggested regarding the variable display corresponding to the hold information. In addition, when the mode of the hold information is maintained until the variable display corresponding to the hold information is executed, it is easier to grasp the identification information suggested for the variable display, and enhance the rendering effect. And the interest in the variable display can be improved.

(Means 4) The gaming machine of Means 4
A gaming machine of means 3,
The hold information is display information (eg, left display information, middle display information, right) corresponding to each of the plurality of variable display areas (eg, left symbol display area 9L, middle symbol display area 9C, right symbol display area 9R) Display information),
At a specific timing (for example, reach state formation timing or temporary stop timing) during variable display to be the target of the suggested effect by a mode of the display information (for example,?, 1 to 9 or pseudo linked symbol (NEXT)) Suggesting identification information to be displayed in the variable display area corresponding to the display information
It is characterized by
According to this, the player can easily grasp the identification information suggested for each of the plurality of variable display areas, and the player's interest can be attracted to the mode of each display information.

(Means 5) The gaming machine of Means 5
Means 3 or 4 of the game machine,
In the suggestion effect, a mode (for example, (left display information, middle display information, right display information) which does not suggest the identification information displayed in any variable display area of the plurality of variable display areas. ) A pattern that suggests identification information to be displayed in at least one of the plurality of variable display areas from the symbol target aspect in which the combination of (), Change the combination of information, middle display information, right display information) to (7,?, 7) to the first pattern of symbols),
It is characterized by
According to this, even if the aspect of the suspension information does not indicate the identification information displayed in any of the variable display areas, it may change to the aspect that suggests the identification information. The mode can attract the player's interest.

(Means 6) The gaming machine of Means 6 is
Any gaming machine selected from the means 3 to 5;
In the suggestion effect, a mode (for example, (left display information, middle display information, right display) that suggests only the identification information displayed in a predetermined variable display area among the plurality of variable display areas. From the symbol first mode in which the combination of information) is (7,?, 7), the identification information displayed in the predetermined variable display area and the variable display area different from the predetermined variable display area are displayed Change to a symbol second mode in which the combination of modes (for example, left display information, middle display information, right display information) is (7, NEXT, 7) that suggests identification information,
It is characterized by
According to this, even if the aspect of the suspension information suggests only the identification information displayed in the predetermined variable display area, the identification information displayed in the variable display area different from the predetermined variable display area Also, the aspect of the hold information can attract the player's interest because the aspect may change to the aspect that also suggests.

(Means 7) The gaming machine of Means 7
Any gaming machine selected from the means 1 to 6,
A first combination (for example, a combination of reach symbols in which the left symbol and the right symbol are common symbols) and a second combination (for example, the left symbol and the right) as combinations of identification information displayed in the plurality of variable display areas There is a combination of temporary stop symbols, where the symbol and the common symbol (for example 7) will be the same symbol and the middle symbol will be the pseudo run symbol (for example NEXT).
In the symbol first mode, the combination of the first suggested effect (for example, (left display information, middle display information, right display information)) indicating the first combination is (7,?, 7) as the suggested effect A design in which the combination of the second indication effect (for example, (left display information, middle display information, right display information)) indicating the second combination is (7, NEXT, 7). There is an effect of changing the hold display in the second mode,
Based on a predetermined condition (for example, when it is determined that the symbol notice mode is set to the second pattern and the number of shifts is determined to be 2 or more at the start winning combination, the variable display of 1 is made at a predetermined ratio) The second suggested effect is executed after the first suggested effect is executed as a target (for example, the pending display is changed from the first symbol pattern to the second symbol pattern),
It is characterized by
According to this, since the second suggestion effect may be executed after the first suggestion effect is executed for one variable display, the player's interest can be maintained even after the first suggestion effect is executed. .

(Means 8) The gaming machine of Means 8
Any gaming machine selected from the means 1 to 7,
A first combination (for example, a combination of reach symbols in which the left symbol and the right symbol are common symbols) and a second combination (for example, the left symbol and the right) as combinations of identification information displayed in the plurality of variable display areas There is a combination of temporary stop symbols, where the symbol and the common symbol (for example 7) will be the same symbol and the middle symbol will be the pseudo run symbol (for example NEXT).
In the symbol first mode, the combination of the first suggested effect (for example, (left display information, middle display information, right display information)) indicating the first combination is (7,?, 7) as the suggested effect A design in which the combination of the second indication effect (for example, (left display information, middle display information, right display information)) indicating the second combination is (7, NEXT, 7). There is an effect of changing the hold display in the second mode,
A first variable display pattern that does not become the second combination via the first combination in the variable display of 1 (for example, a variation pattern of reach without pseudo run) and the first combination in the variable display of 1 There is a second variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern of reach with pseudo link) which is the second combination,
The rate at which the display result of the variable display is the specific display result is higher in the variable display of the second variable display pattern than in the variable display of the first variable display pattern (e.g. The pattern is more reliable than the fluctuation pattern of the no-sequence reach)
When the first indication effect is performed for the variable display of 1, and the second indication effect is not performed, and after the first indication effect is performed for the variable display of 1, the second indication effect is performed. There is a case to do (1 case where the suspension display does not change from the symbol first aspect to the symbol second mode, and when the 1 suspension display changes from the symbol first mode to the symbol second mode),
It is characterized by
According to this, there is a case where the second suggestion effect is not performed after the first suggestion effect is executed for the variable display of 1 and a case where the second suggestion effect is performed, so after the execution of the first suggestion effect Even the player's interest can be sustained.

  Furthermore, the means 9-12 shown below are also included in the form for implementing invention mentioned later.

(Means 9) The gaming machine of the means 9 starts after the game medium (for example, the game ball) passes the start area (for example, the first start winning port 13 or the second start winning port 14) provided in the game area A condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and a big hit game is not executed) is established. The variable display (for example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variable display of the effect design) of a plurality of kinds of identification information which can identify each based on each other, and the identification specified in advance as the display result of the variable display A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player when a display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, and when a gaming medium passes through the start area Numerical data extraction means for extracting numerical data (for example, a portion where the gaming control microcomputer 560 executes steps S1216 and S1227) and the start condition is still established despite the fact that the game medium has passed the start area Hold storage means capable of storing numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means as pending storage (eg, first pending storage or second pending storage) up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) for non-variable display (For example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage buffer), a hold display unit (for example, a total hold storage display unit 18c) for displaying the hold storage stored in the hold storage unit as a hold display, and a start condition Means for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is to be the specific display result based on the fact that Whether the display result of the variable display based on the pending storage stored in the pending storage means becomes the specific display result before the microcomputer 560 executes steps S61, S62, and S73) and the determination of the predetermining means The display mode of the suspension display is the normal mode (in this example, “o”: FIG. 47). The determination mode is for determining whether or not it is determined (for example, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control executes steps S1217 and S1228). (A)) and a special embodiment (in the present example, six lines are drawn on the outside of “o”: see FIG. 48 (B)) which is an embodiment different from the normal embodiment; And the first special mode (in this example, "x" is included in "o": see FIG. 47 (B1)) and the second special mode (in this example, "o"), which are modes different from the special mode. Contains two "x" (See (B2) in FIG. 47), and the pending display corresponding to the pending storage determined by the specific determining means at a different ratio according to the determination result of the specific determining means in the first special aspect or the second An effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S67106, S67114, S1813, S1845, etc.) capable of executing a pending announcement effect (for example, pre-read effect) to be displayed in a special mode. 31 (B)), and the effect execution means performs the first special mode or the first special mode or the second method for displaying the pending display at a plurality of timings (for example, timing of start winning, arbitrary shift timing, other arbitrary timing, etc.). (2) It is possible to change to a special mode and display, and when the hold display is displayed in a special mode (for example, it is decided that the microcomputer 100 for effect control executes the pre-reading effect in the second pre-reading effect pattern in step S67107 (When step S67112 is executed) changes the hold indication from the special mode to the first or second special mode until variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is started. Display (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs steps S1803, S1809, S1813, and S184). Portion executes the like. FIG. 32, FIG. 34, reference FIGS. 48 49) be characterized.
With such a configuration, it is possible to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings, thereby providing diversity in the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display. While the hold display is displayed in the special mode, the game display can be improved because the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode.

(Means 10) In means 9, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the effect control means determines that the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the pre-reading effect with the second pre-reading effect pattern in step S67107, and step S67112 is performed. It is decided to change from the normal mode to the special mode at the time of execution (timing of start winnings) or at any shift timing from start winnings to the start of variation display based on the starting winnings or any other timing. The first display (for example, the first display after the start winning) until the display of the pending display in a special mode when the timing is reached and the variable display based on the pending storage corresponding to the pending display is started Different from the first timing) or the timing at which the The suspension display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed at a second timing (e.g., a timing at which the second suspension display is shifted after start winning or any timing) (For example, the microcomputer for effect control 100 executes steps S1803, S1809, S1813, S1845, etc., see FIG. 34, FIG. 48 to FIG. 49), and it is determined that the specific determination means is the specific display result Between the special mode and the first special mode or the second special mode at the first timing or the second timing at different rates when the specific determination means determines that the specific display result does not result. (Eg, a portion where the effect control microcomputer 100 executes step S67108, etc.). See) may be configured so.
According to such a configuration, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the display mode changes, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

(Means 11) In means 9 or 10, the restriction means for restricting the display of the hold display in the special mode when the hold display is displayed in the special mode (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs step S67101 , S67111, etc.) may be configured.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to which hold display should be focused when a plurality of hold displays are displayed in a special mode.

(Means 12) In any of the means 9 to 11, when the effect determination means determines that the specific determination means results in the specific display result, the effect determination means determines that the specific display result does not occur. The on-hold notice effect is displayed to display the on-hold display corresponding to the on-hold storage determined by the specific determination means in the second special mode at a relatively high ratio (for example, the microcomputer 100 for effect control performs steps S67106 and S67114 , S 1813, S 1845, etc. (See FIG. 31B), a suspension notice effect pattern (for example, a second prefetching effect) to be displayed by changing the suspension display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode The first effect (for example, a black arrow is flying and a stabbing indication on the hold display (Success pata) A second arrow (for example, a white arrow flies) different from the first rendition when displaying the suspension display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. There is a time when it is possible to perform suggestion effect (success pattern) to be stabbed in the hold display, and to display the hold display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. The hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed at different rates when it is performed and when the second effect is performed (for example, microcomputer for effect control) A portion 100 executes steps S67106, S67110, S1813, S1845, etc. It may be configured as shown in FIG.
According to such a configuration, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode, it is possible to focus attention on which of the first effect and the second effect is to be performed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a production control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows 2 ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. FIG. 17 is an explanatory drawing showing an example of the contents of a winning determination result specification command and a symbol specification command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding buffer. It is a flow chart which shows production processing at the time of winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing which CPU for production control performs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading production decision processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal pre-reading effect setting process. It is a flow chart which shows design pre-reading effect setting processing. It is an explanatory view showing a pre-reading effect execution decision table and a final display mode decision table. It is an explanatory view showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a reach symbol determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a look-ahead effect change timing determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a suggestion production mode determination table. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stop design of a production design. It is an explanatory view showing the example of composition of process data. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end production processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the aspect of a pending | holding display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the normal pre-reading effect based on a 1st pre-reading effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the normal pre-reading effect based on a 2nd pre-reading effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the normal pre-reading effect based on a 2nd pre-reading effect pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a symbol pre-reading effect. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a symbol pre-reading effect. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example after execution of a symbol pre-reading effect. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example after execution of a symbol pre-reading effect. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a symbol pre-reading effect. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a symbol pre-reading effect.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play frame is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (a game to be described later And the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the bat supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball tray 4 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the bat supply tray 3, and a bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 for firing a bat. In addition, on the back of the glass door frame 2, the game board 6 is detachably attached. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Thus, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, there are symbol display areas for variably displaying effect symbols for three decorations (for effect), for example, “left”, “middle” and “right”. The effect symbol display area is a left symbol display area 9L, which is an area in which the effect symbol of “left” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as left symbol) is variably displayed, and the effect symbol of “middle” (hereinafter, middle symbol and A middle symbol display area 9C, which is an area where variable display is displayed, and a right symbol display area 9R, an area where a "right" effect design (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a right symbol) is variably displayed It consists of That is, in each of these symbol display areas, variable display of a plurality of types of effect symbols capable of identifying each is executed. In this embodiment, the effect symbols variably displayed in each symbol display area of left symbol display area 9L, middle symbol display area 9C, and right symbol display area 9R are symbols of numbers "1" to "9" respectively. Shall be In addition, the pseudo | simulation consecutive symbol which comprises the combination of the temporary stop symbol mentioned later may be displayed on middle symbol display area 9C.

  Thus, although there are symbol display areas of “left”, “middle” and “right” in the symbol display area, the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 And three areas of the symbol display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the symbol display 8b, the effect display is performed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game .

  On the left side of the upper part of the effect display device 9 in the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display means) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). On the right side of the upper part of the effect display device 9 in the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display means) 8b for variably displaying a second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols).

  In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers from 0 to 9), but the types may be different. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator.

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may have only one special symbol display.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening After having won 14), the start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not being executed, and The game is started based on the establishment of the jackpot game), and when the variable display time (variation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. In addition, a winning is that a game ball has entered an area, such as a winning opening, which is determined in advance as a winning area. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 14 (it becomes easy to get a start prize), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 than the first starting winning hole 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided to perform the opening and closing operation only for the second starting winning opening 14, but the first starting winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 13 The configuration may be such that a variable winning ball device that performs opening and closing operations is provided for any of the start winning openings 14.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state, the gaming ball heading to the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win a prize in the second start winning opening 14. And although the first start winning opening 13 is provided immediately below the effect display 9, the distance between the lower end of the effect display 9 and the first start winning opening 13 can be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening It is difficult to arrange nails closely around 13 and to make it difficult to guide the game balls to the first start winning opening 13 by arranging the nails around the first starting winning opening 13, so that the winning ratio of the second start winning opening 14 You may make it be higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  At the lower part of the first special symbol display 8a, 4 is displayed to indicate the number of activated winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first holding storage number (holding storage is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning storage). A first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a consisting of one indicator (for example, an LED) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one. For example, it is realized by execution of processing for performing display control in display control processing (step S22) of timer interrupt processing described later.

  At the lower part of the second special symbol display 8b, the second special symbol hold consisting of four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, ie, the second reserved memory number A storage indicator 18b is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one. For example, it is realized by execution of processing for performing display control in display control processing (step S22) of timer interrupt processing described later.

  In addition, in the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there is provided a combined hold storage display unit 18c that displays the total number (total hold storage number) which is the sum of the first reserve storage number and the second reserve storage number. ing. In this embodiment, the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage and the second hold storage is displayed in the order of winning on the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 in the total hold storage display unit 18c. Ru. In this embodiment, the suspension display is arranged and displayed in the order of winning on the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 from the left as viewed from the player of the total hold storage display portion 18c. Note that the total hold storage display unit 18c may display the first hold storage or the second hold storage in a recognizable manner (for example, the first hold storage is displayed in red) , Second pending storage may be displayed in blue). Further, even if the first hold storage display unit for displaying the first hold storage number and the second hold storage display unit for displaying the second hold storage number are provided instead of the total hold storage display unit 18c. Good.

  The effect display device 9 is used for decoration during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. Variable display of the production design as a design of The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. The synchronization means that the start point and the end point of the variable display are approximately the same (or may be the same) and the periods of the variable display are substantially the same (or may be the same). In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning prize ball device 20 has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the display is derived, the opening / closing plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, whereby the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  An ordinary symbol display 10 is provided at the lower part of the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “o” and “x”) called a normal symbol.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbol is visible when lit). For example, if the lower lamp is lit at the end of the variable display, it becomes a hit. . Then, when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state advantageous to the player from a disadvantageous state (a state where the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14) Change to In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 having four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes to the gate 32, that is, each time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of lighted indicators by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one. Furthermore, in a probability change state in which the probability determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 will be hit is increased and the variable winning ball device 15 The opening time is extended, and the number of times of opening is increased. That is, in the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled such that the game ball is likely to be start winning (that is, the condition for executing the variable display on the special symbol displays 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily established). Transition. Further, in this embodiment, the open time of the variable winning ball device 15 is extended and the number of times of opening is increased also in the time saving state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened).

  In addition, instead of extending the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), the transition to the normal symbol certainty state in which the probability of the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hitting is increased. It is possible to move to the high base state. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by performing transition control to the normal symbol certainty state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits will be increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if it shifts to the normal symbol certainty variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning prize ball device 15 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is enhanced when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or the stop symbol of a special symbol is a definite symbol, etc. Change to an advantageous state (start start winning state). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that includes changing from the closed state to the open state.

  In addition, the transition to the high base state may be made by transitioning to the normal symbol time short state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency at which the variation of the normal symbol starts is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the normal symbol is hit is increased. Therefore, when the frequency with which the normal symbol is hit is high, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is high, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy.

  In addition, by shifting to a short time state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, the variation time of the special symbol and the representation symbol is shortened, so an effective start winning is likely to occur. There is a high probability that a big hit game will be played.

  In addition, it is possible to start winning easily (transition to the high base state) by transitioning to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal pattern exact variation state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) May be In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high base (high base) (Transition to the state).

  At the left and right periphery of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there is provided an decoration LED 25 which blinks during the game, and at the lower part there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. Further, two speakers 27R and 27L for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided at the upper left and right of the game area 7, respectively. On the outer peripheral upper portion, outer peripheral left portion and outer peripheral right portion of the game area 7, a sky frame LED 28a, a left frame LED 28b and a right frame LED 28c provided on the front frame are provided. Also, a prize ball LED 51 is provided in the vicinity of the left frame LED 28 b to be lit when there is a remaining number of prize balls, and a ball out LED 52 is provided in the vicinity of the right frame LED 28 c to be lit when the supply sphere is broken. . The sky frame LED 28 a, the left frame LED 28 b, the right frame LED 28 c, and the decorative LED 25 are an example of a light emitter for effect provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition to the various LEDs for effect (for decoration) described above, LEDs and lamps for effect are installed.

  In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, it is possible to start variable display of the first special symbol (for example, variable display of the special symbol is ended, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the first number of pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is ended and started) The condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 8b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 14. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 has a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control) and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57 including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Also, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and start occurs at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning is at the time of reading out (extraction) of numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number.

  The random number circuit 503 has a selection setting function of updating range of numerical data (setting selection function of initial value and selection setting function of upper limit value), a selection setting function of updating rule of numerical data, and selection of update rule of numerical data It has various functions such as switching function. Such a function can improve the randomness of the generated random number.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560) The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads out the numerical data from the random number circuit 503 as random R when the first start hole switch 13a or the second start hole switch 14a is subjected to the start winning combination, and starts the variation of the special symbol and the effect symbol. Sometimes it is decided based on random R whether or not to make a jackpot display result as a specific display result, that is, whether or not to be a jackpot. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state that is advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source, part or all of which is created on the power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as the special symbol process flag and the value of the combined hold storage number counter) and data indicating the number of unpaid award balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

  A reset signal (not shown) from the power supply substrate is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. The power supply substrate is provided with a reset circuit that generates a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 560 or the like. When the reset signal goes high, the gaming control microcomputer 560 becomes operable, and when the resetting signal goes low, the gaming control microcomputer 560 goes into a stopped state. Therefore, while the reset signal is at the high level, an allowance signal for permitting the operation of the gaming control microcomputer 560 or the like is output, and the period when the reset signal is at the low level is the gaming control microcomputer. An operation stop signal for stopping the operation of 560 and the like is output. The reset circuit may be mounted on each of the electric component control boards (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Further, to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped to a predetermined value or less is input. That is, the power supply substrate monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC 30 V, DC 5 V, etc.) used in the game machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value determined in advance A power supply monitoring circuit is mounted which outputs a power-off signal indicating that when it detects it). A clear signal (not shown) indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for providing detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. In addition, the main circuit board is also a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, and an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 for forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on 31. Furthermore, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating the occurrence of a big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The effect control command is received, and display control with the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect pattern is performed.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35 and the sound output board 70. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control substrate 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70.

  The effect control board 80 is mounted with the effect control microcomputer 100 including the effect control CPU 101 and the RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and takes in a signal taken from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( According to the effect control (INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  Further, the RAM provided in the effect control microcomputer 100 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, a part of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part of the RAM provided in the effect control microcomputer 100 is maintained for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). The content is saved. In particular, at least data indicating a gaming state (a probability change state flag or a time saving state flag described later) is stored in the backup RAM. However, in this embodiment, the value of the time saving after counter for counting the number of changes after the shift to the time saving state described later is not stored in the backup RAM.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 for controlling display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM there. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

  The effect control CPU 101 reads out necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for previously storing character image data to be displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures or symbols (including an effect pattern). The effect control CPU 101 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control based on data input from the CPU for effect control 101.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 in the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 only passes the signal input from the relay board 77 in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77) It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

  As a signal direction regulation means which allows the signal input from the main substrate 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control substrate 80 (does not allow the signal to pass in the direction from the effect control substrate 80 to the relay substrate 77) in the relay substrate 77 A unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, diodes or transistors are used as unidirectional circuits. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Also, unidirectional circuits are provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 through the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. In addition, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver substrate 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a drive signal to each of the LEDs provided on the frame side such as the sky frame LED 28 a, the left frame LED 28 b, and the right frame LED 28 c. Also, a drive signal is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side. When a light emitter other than the LED is provided, a drive circuit (driver) for driving the light emitter is mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The speech synthesis IC 703 generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs the speech and the sound effects to the amplification circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 amplifies the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 and outputs the signal to the speakers 27R and 27L. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect pattern).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main substrate 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is inputted becomes high level, and the microcomputer for gaming control 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid, is performed, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) etc.) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply substrate) input through the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether data protection processing (for example, processing at the time of power supply stop such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

  After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state recovery processing for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply (steps S41 to S43). Process). Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (the area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data (special symbol process flag, positive change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), And a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 also transmits to the effect control board 80 a combined pending storage number specification command in which the value of the combined pending storage number counter stored in the backup RAM is set in the process of step S43. .

  In this embodiment, although both the backup flag and the check data are used to check whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored or not, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the gaming state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number per judgment for normal symbols) is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process, but it is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number per determination) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a flag for performing selective processing according to the control state, such as a random symbol counter for determining a normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. The value is set.

  In addition, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the gaming control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub board (the board on which the microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). ) Is sent to the sub-substrate (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process of initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 performs setting for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of random R, for example, by executing processing in accordance with the random number circuit setting program.

  Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 2 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing, interrupt disabled state is set (step S16), and when execution of display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing is completed, interrupt permitted state is set. It sets (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not being a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to be a reach when not being a big hit. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of the count value of a counter (normal pattern random number generation counter for determination per pattern) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol. It is a random number to decide. The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 560 controls the game display devices such as the effect display device provided in the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself Count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or to control other microcomputers, the count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern is 1 round When the value is advanced by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value, the initial value is set to the counter.

  In the present embodiment, the reach effect is performed using the effect pattern variably displayed in the effect display device 9. Moreover, when making the display result of a special symbol into a big hit symbol, reach production is always performed except in the case of making it a big hit symbol of a sudden change big hit. When the display result of the special symbol is not made a big hit symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the reach effect is to be executed by a lottery using random numbers. However, it is the effect control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the control of the reach effect.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply substrate detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 56 executes the power-supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Subsequently, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input through the input driver circuit 58, and the states of them are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 displays the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol hold memory indicator 18a, the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b, the ordinary symbol A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage indicator 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the normal symbol display 10, drive signals are output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Further, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol-performing determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs processing for updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding processing in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a winning ball process for setting the number of winning balls based on the detection signals of the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro-circuit mounted on the payout control board 37 according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball dispenser 97 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to the ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing of setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32). For example, if the change speed is 1 scene / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process processing is set, for example. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. In addition, the CPU 56 outputs the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b and Execute variable display of the second special symbol.

  Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 changes the display state ("○" and "x") every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data (for example, 1 indicating "o" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S34), and the process is ended.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be performed in

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A combination of predetermined rendering symbols that do not reach will be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally lost") when the variable display result is a lost design.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after reaching the reach state, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not finally become a big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach out") when the variable display result is "off".

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is suddenly displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b except for the big hit symbol of the probability variation big hit suddenly, the variable display state of the production symbol is the reach After reaching the state, reach effect is executed, and finally the effect symbols are aligned and stopped on the "left", "middle" and "right" symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R in the effect display 9 Ru.

  When "5" which is a small hit is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display mode of the effect design in the effect display device 9 is "suddenly, certain variation big hit" In the same manner as in the above case, after the variable display of the rendering symbol is performed, a predetermined small hitting symbol (suddenly the same symbol as the probability changing big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the stop display of the small hit symbol "5" on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as a "small hit" variable display mode .

  Here, the small hit is an allowed hit up to the number of times the number of opening of the large winning opening is smaller than the number of the large winning opening (in this embodiment, two times of opening for 0.1 seconds). When the small hit game is over, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the positive change state to the normal state or from the normal state to the positive change state. In addition, the sudden change big hit is allowed the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is small in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening time of 0.1 seconds twice), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely It is a short jackpot, and it is a jackpot to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to a definite change state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it were suddenly changed to a definite change state Is). That is, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is the same between the sudden change big hit and the small hit suddenly. By controlling in this way, when the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds, it is not possible to recognize whether it is a big hit or a small hit suddenly. (Perspective change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern of a rendering symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the rendering symbol is not accompanied by the reach state, shortening non-reach out and non-reach out Is prepared. In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect pattern involves the reach state, the normal is deviated, the pseudo run 1 normal is slipped, the super run out, the pseudo run 2 super run off and the pseudo run 3 supermarkets are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 6, in the case of using a shift of the pseudo reciprocation 1 normal among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the effects of the pseudo ream, revariation is performed once. Further, in the case of using a shift of the pseudo run 2 super among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the pseudo run effect, the re-run is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using a shift of the pseudo run 3 super among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the pseudo run effect, the rerun is performed three times. In addition, re-variation is to execute the variable display of the production symbol again after temporarily stopping the production symbol that is temporarily distracted from the start of the variable display of the production symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  In this embodiment, in the case of a pseudo reciprocation fluctuation pattern with re-variation, that is, when temporary stopping of the production design is performed, after the reach state in which the left design and the right design are aligned with the common production design is established The combination of the temporary stop symbols is completed by stopping the pseudo run symbols (for example, the symbol of the character "NEXT" shown in FIG. 52) as the middle symbol. In the case where re-variation is performed once (in the case of the variation pattern of pseudo ream 1), a combination of temporary stop symbols (for example, "left", "middle" and "right" effect symbols are "7" after reach condition is established) After the combination of "NEXT" and "7" is displayed for a temporary stop, the rendering symbols of "left", "middle" and "right" are re-varied. In the case where re-variation is performed twice (in the case of the variation pattern of the pseudo ream 2), the cycle from the establishment of the reach state to the re-variation is repeatedly performed twice and re-variation is performed three times (pseudo ream In the case of the fluctuation pattern of 3, the cycle from the establishment of the reach state to the re-variation is repeatedly performed three times. In this embodiment, since the reach state is always established in the case of the pseudo-series fluctuation pattern, the final reach state in the fluctuation pattern is established after the cycle of the determined number of times is completed. That is, the reach state of the number of re-variation times + 1 is established.

  Here, in this embodiment, when temporary stop is performed a plurality of times (if it is a fluctuation pattern of pseudo run 2 or 3), all combinations of temporary stop symbols in the temporary stop are common. It shall be. Further, the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol) constituting the combination of the temporary stop symbol and the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol) when the last reach state is established are assumed to be a common symbol. For example, when re-variation is performed three times (pseudo ream 3), if the temporary stop symbol in the first temporary stop is a combination of “7” “NEXT” “7”, the temporary stop symbol in the second temporary stop Is a combination of “7”, “NEXT” and “7”, and the temporary stop symbol at the third temporary stop is also a combination of “7”, “NEXT” and “7”. The reach symbols to be stopped in the left symbol display area 9L and the right symbol display area 9R in the final reach state are all "7".

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the pseudo run symbol (in this example, the character symbol of "NEXT") constituting the middle symbol of the temporary stop symbol is the effect symbol ("1" to "9") in the middle symbol display area 9C. Is not displayed in the middle symbol display area 9C, and temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 9C at the timing of temporary stop. That is, the pseudo connected symbol is a symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 9C at the timing of temporary stop, although it is not displayed in any of the left, middle, and right symbol display areas while the effect symbol is changing. In addition, although temporary stop in this embodiment refers to the stop of the combination of the production symbols before the combination of the production symbols to be displayed is derived and displayed, it is not always necessary that the production symbols are completely stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be enlarged or reduced or rocked. In this embodiment, the timing of the temporary stop is determined in advance for each variation pattern.

  Further, among the variation patterns shown in FIG. 6, the shortened non-reach loss is a variation pattern for shortening provided for the non-reach loss and for which the variation time is shorter than the non-reach loss.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol is usually a big hit or a probability variation big hit, per normal, 1 per ream, per super, per imitation ream Per 2 supermarkets and pseudo ream per 3 supermarkets are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8, in the case of using a simulated reciprocation per normal among the fluctuation patterns accompanied with pseudo ream effects, re-variation is performed once. In addition, in the case of using per simulated ream 2 super among fluctuation patterns accompanied with pseudo ream effects, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using per simulated ream 3 super among fluctuation patterns accompanied by pseudo ream effects, re-variation is performed three times.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, a special hit is prepared as a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result of the special symbol suddenly becomes a big hit or a small hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the fluctuation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of a super reach with a pseudo run (three times), the fluctuation is Although the time is fixed at 40 seconds and the variation time is fixed at 25 seconds in the case of a super reach without pseudo run), for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, addition The variation time may be varied according to the number of pending storages. For example, even with the same type of super reach, as the total number of pending storages increases, the variation time may be shortened. In addition, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, in the case of performing variable display of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time may be varied according to the first number of pending storage, (2) In the case of performing variable display of a special symbol, the fluctuation time may be made different according to the second number of pending storages. In this case, separate tables are prepared for each value of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (for example, the variation pattern determination table for the pending storage number 0 to 2 and the pending storage number 3 and 4) The variation pattern determination table may be prepared, and the variation time may be made different by selecting the determination table according to the value of the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time is configured to be different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state (in the example shown in FIG. 6, the time-saving state). The judgment value is set so that the rate at which “shortened non-reach is deviated” whose fluctuation time is short compared to other fluctuation patterns is selected is high), not limited to this, a normal state (or short time state) Even in this case, the fluctuation time may be different (that is, the ratio of selection of fluctuation patterns having a short fluctuation time may be different) according to the total number of pending storages. For example, as the total number of pending storages increases, the fluctuation time may be shortened (that is, the proportion of selection of fluctuation patterns having a short fluctuation time may be increased). Also, for example, when the first special symbol is subjected to fluctuation display, the fluctuation time is made different (that is, the ratio in which the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected is made different) according to the first number of pending storages If the second special symbol is to be displayed in a variable manner, the fluctuation time is made different according to the second reserved memory number (that is, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected is made different) You may do so. In this case, separate tables are prepared for each value of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (for example, the variation pattern determination table for the pending storage number 0 to 2 and the pending storage number 3 and 4) The variation pattern determination table may be prepared, and the variation time may be made different by selecting the determination table according to the value of the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number.

  When configured to use different variation pattern determination tables according to the number of pending storages, for example, the variation pattern determination table used when the display result is out and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more is total pending As compared with the fluctuation pattern determination table used when the number of memories is 0 to 2, the determination value is assigned such that the ratio of reach (normal reach, super reach) is reduced. In addition, the fluctuation pattern determination table used when the total number of pending storages is three or more is determined so that the rate at which “shortened non-reach out” is selected is short as compared to other fluctuation patterns. Is set. As a result, as the total number of pending storages increases, the average fluctuation time can be shortened, and the situation in which the operation rate of the variable display decreases can be prevented as much as possible.

  In addition, the variation pattern determination table used when the total number of pending storages is three or more and the variation pattern determination table used when the total number of pending storages is 0 to 2 have specific effects (for example, super reach). A common judgment value (e.g., 950 to 997, etc.) is assigned to a fluctuation pattern (or a set of such fluctuation patterns) with. Therefore, regardless of the total number of pending storages (that is, even if the used variation pattern determination table is different), it is possible to identify a specific effect by confirming the value of the extracted variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) at the start winning combination. For example, it can be easily determined in advance whether or not it involves super reach. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the specific effect (for example, super reach) is accompanied before the variable display corresponding to the start winning (for example, the effect control command indicating that is sent to the microcomputer 100 for effect control). This can be realized by performing effects such as pre-reading effect and the like in the microcomputer for effect control 100 that has transmitted and received the effect control command), thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, although the case where the allocation of the determination value is made to differ is shown about two types of whether the total pending memory number is 0-2 or 3 or more, it does not restrict to this, for example, according to the total pending memory number Furthermore, the allocation may be made to differ in stages in more detail. In this case, for example, a variation pattern determination table for the total number of pending storages 0, 1 and a variation pattern determination table for two total pending storages, three for total pending storages and four for total pending storages It is possible to prepare in advance, and to make the assignment of the judgment value to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach or the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation different gradually.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of jackpot (normal jackpot described later, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 3 (MR 3): Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(3) Random 4 (MR 4): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol determination)
(4) Random 5 (MR 5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for random 4 initial value determination)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined to be any variation pattern included in the variation pattern determination table using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3).

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating a jackpot type determination random number of (1) and a random number per normal symbol determination of (4). Perform count up (1 addition). That is, those are the judgment random numbers, and the other random numbers are the display random number (random 3) or the initial value random number (random 5). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Further, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware (which may be hardware outside the gaming control microcomputer 560) built in the gaming control microcomputer 560 is used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal time big hit determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state which is not a definite change state) and a positive change time big hit determination table used in a positive change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 8A is set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 8A in the positive change time jackpot determination table Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is the jackpot determination value.

  FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. In the small hit determination table, a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing variable display of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol (For the second special symbol) and there. Each numerical value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), in FIG. 8C. Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. If any of the big hit judgment values are matched, it is decided to make it a big hit (normal big hit, positive variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit which will be described later) for the special symbol. If the jackpot determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicates the probability (percentage) of being a small hit. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit is deciding whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit is to decide whether to shift to a small hitting gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when using the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), it is determined to be a small hit at a ratio of 1/300. In the case where the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where it is determined to be a small hit at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of The percentage determined as "small hit" is higher than when variable display is performed.

  8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131 a of the case. Further, FIG. 8E shows the case where the jackpot type is determined by using the retention memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  When it is determined that the big hit classification determination table 131a, 131b is to make the variable display result a big hit symbol, the type of the big hit "normal big hit", based on the random number (random 1) for the big hit type determination, " It is a table to be referred to in order to determine either “probability big hit” or “suddenly big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, in the jackpot type determination table 131a, 10 judgment values are assigned to "Suddenly probability variation big hit" (40 minutes Whereas in the big hit category determination table 131b, 3 decision values are assigned to the "suddenly probable variation big hit" (proportion of 3/40). The case where it is determined to be a definite big hit suddenly. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of As compared with the case where the variable display is performed, the rate at which the "sudden probability change big hit" is determined is high. "Suddenly probability variation big hit" is distributed only to the first special symbol big hit classification determination table 131a, and "suddenly probability variation big hit" is not distributed to the second special symbol big hit classification determination table 131b (that is, , And may be determined as "suddenly probability variation big hit" only when performing the variable display of the first special symbol). The determination values set in the table are different in number and are not allocated redundantly.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), there are two rounds of sudden odd change big hit as a first specific gaming state for giving a predetermined amount of gaming value, which is larger than the gaming value. The case of determining 15 rounds of big hit (probable variation big hit or normal big hit) as the second specific gaming state to which the amount of game value is given will be described, but when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first 1 shows the case where it is determined to be in the specific gaming state, but the gaming value to be provided is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, as the gaming value to determine the second specific gaming state to increase the allowable number of winning number (count number) of gaming balls to the large winning opening per round It is also good. In addition, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state may be determined in which the opening time of the big winning opening per jackpot as a gaming value is increased as the gaming value. Also, for example, even if it is a big hit of the same 15 rounds, a first specific gaming state in which the large winning opening is opened once per round, and a second specific gaming state in which the large winning opening is opened multiple times per round The game value of the second specific gaming state may be enhanced by preparing and opening the number of times of opening of the special winning opening substantially. In this case, for example, in either the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, in the case of the first specific gaming state, all 15 rounds) In the case of the second specific gaming state, an undigested round is left), and an effect may be executed in such a manner as to ask whether or not the big hit continues further. Then, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the big hit game is ended since all 15 rounds are internally ended, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, internally undivided rounds remain Therefore, the big hit game may be continued (the effect that opening of the big winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after ending the big hit of 15 times open) may be performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, there are "normal big hit", "probably big hit" and "suddenly big hit" as the big hit types.

  "Perhaps a big hit" is a big hit that controls to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to a positive changing state after the big hitting gaming state ends (in this embodiment, it is transferred to a positive changing state and also to a short time (Refer to steps S170 and S171 described later). Then, after shifting to the definite change state, the positive change state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S134 described later).

  Also, "normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state, is not transferred to the definite change state after the big hit gaming state ends, and is only transferred to time saving state (see step S167 described later) . Then, after shifting to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until the execution of the variation display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is ended a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (see steps S142 to S145 described later). In this embodiment, the time saving state ends even if a big hit occurs before ending the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times after shifting to the time saving state (see step S134 described later).

  Also, "a sudden definite big hit" is allowed up to the number of times the opening number of the big winning opening is smaller than "a positive variation big hit" or a "normal big hit" (in this embodiment, 2 times of opening for 0.1 seconds). It is a big hit. That is, in the case of "a sudden odd change big hit", it is controlled to a big hit gaming state of two rounds. And in this embodiment, after the end of the big hit gaming state of the two rounds, it shifts to a definite change state (In this embodiment, it shifts to a definite change state and also shifts to a time saving state. Step S170 mentioned later. , S171)). Then, after shifting to the definite change state, the positive change state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S134 described later).

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of a "small hit", the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the big hit gaming state by "a sudden definite big hit" Similar control is performed. Then, in the case of "small hit", after the opening of the special winning opening is finished, the gaming state does not change, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained (described later) Steps S147 to S151). By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether the game is a sudden sudden big hit or a small hit, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The jackpot type judgment tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and the judgment values corresponding to "normal jackpot", "probably variable big hit", and "suddenly odd variable big hit" (big hit type judgment value ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the big hit type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of big hit as the type corresponding to the matched big hit type determination value.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. The variation pattern determination table is a table that is referred to determine the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types based on the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the jackpot type, the gaming state, etc. is there. When the value of (1 to 997) of the extracted random 3 matches the data (determination value) assigned to each variation pattern, the CPU 56 changes the variation pattern to a pattern corresponding to the determination value of the matching variation pattern. decide. In the example shown in FIG. 9, the ratio of the determination value assigned for each variation pattern is shown. For example, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be "off" in the normal gaming state ("off" field in FIG. 9), the determination value corresponding to the value of random 3 (1 to 997) 50% of them are set to the fluctuation pattern "non-reach out". That is, in the example shown in FIG. 9, each value set in the fluctuation pattern determination table is “off”, “off” (time reduction), “normal big hit / probable big hit” or “suddenly positive big hit” In the case of “small hit time”, the ratio determined for the associated fluctuation pattern is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 9, for example, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be "off" in the normal gaming state ("off" field in FIG. 9), among the plurality of types of variation patterns, The rate at which it is determined that "non-reach is out" is the highest, and the rate at which it is determined that "simulated rerun 3 super is off" is the lowest. Also, for example, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be “off” in the time saving state (“off (time reduction)” field in FIG. 9), “non-off” field is different from “non-off” field. Judgment values are assigned such that the rate at which it is determined that "shortage non-reach is not performed" is high without being determined as reach out. By setting in this manner, in the time saving state, a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time can be easily selected.

  In addition, in the case where it is determined that the variable display result is to be “normally big hit” or “probably big hit” (“normal big hit / probable big hit” field in FIG. 9), the variation pattern with pseudo-series effects The judgment value is assigned such that the ratio determined as “per pseudo recurrent 3 super” is the highest, and the ratio determined as “pseudo ream 1 normal” is the lowest. That is, in the “normal big hit / probable variation big hit” field, a variation pattern having a large number of pseudo runs among the variation patterns with pseudo run effects is easily selected. Therefore, in the pseudo-series effect, the larger the number of pseudo-sequences, the higher the expectation that the variable display result is a big hit. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9, the variation pattern with normal reach (normally deviated, pseudo reciprocated 1 normal deviated, per normal and per simulated reciprocate 1 normal) is a fluctuation pattern with super reach (superly distracted, pseudo reciprocated 2 superlyed) The pseudo rerun 3 super is more likely to be selected when the variable display result is "off" than per super, per pseudo re run 2 super (per pseudo rerun 3 super). Conversely, the variation pattern with super reach (super off, pseudo rerun 2 super, pseudo rerun 3 super, per super, pseudo rerun 2 super and pseudo rerun 3 super) is the fluctuation pattern with normal reach (normal fall The pseudo-repeat 1 normal is deviated, the normal display and the pseudo-repeat 1 normal) are more likely to be selected when the variable display result is “normally big hit” or “probably variable big hit”. Therefore, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern with super reach has a higher expectation that the variable display result is a big hit than the fluctuation pattern with normal reach.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9, the fluctuation pattern of reach with pseudo-series effect (pse-run 1 normal shift, pseudo-run 2 super shift, pseudo-run 3 super shift, pseudo run 1 normal, pseudo run 2 super, and When the variable display result is "normal big hit" or "probably hit big hit" rather than the fluctuation pattern of reach (without normal repeating, super losing, normal hitting, and super hitting) without pseudo-linking effect It is easy to be selected. When the change pattern of reach with the pseudo-series effect is selected, the ratio of the big hit is set to be higher than when the change pattern of the reach without the pseudo-series effect is selected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the variation pattern of reach with pseudo-series effect has a higher expectation that the variable display result is a big hit than the fluctuation pattern of reach without pseudo-series effect.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9, in the case where it is determined that the variable display result is "suddenly probability variation big hit" or "small hit" ("sudden probability variation big hit / small hit" field in FIG. 9), The variation pattern is determined to be "special hit".

  10 and 11 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, command 80XX (H) is a production control command (a variation pattern command for specifying a variation pattern of a production symbol variably displayed on the presentation display device 9 corresponding to a variable display of a special symbol ) (Each corresponding to fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns which can be used shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect pattern.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and a type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation specification command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation specification command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the effect symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends variable display (variation) of the effect pattern and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation Send a command

  The command 95XX (H) and the command C4XX (H) are effect control commands indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of start winning. Among these commands, the command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (winning determination result specifying command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result (variation pattern). In this embodiment, the microcomputer for game control 560 determines which variation pattern is to be used at the time of start winning in the effect processing at the time of winning (see FIG. 16) described later. Then, a value for designating the fluctuation pattern as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the prize determination result specification result command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a winning determination determination result designation command and the contents of a symbol designation command to be described later. As shown in FIG. 12, in this embodiment, a value is set to the EXT data according to which variation pattern is determined at the start winning combination, and a winning determination determination result designation command is transmitted. For example, when it is determined that the variation pattern is "shortened non-reach out" at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14, a winning that set "01 (H)" in the EXT data The hour judgment result specification command is sent. In addition, for example, when it is determined that the variation pattern is "special hit" at the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, a winning that sets "13 (H)" in the EXT data The hour judgment result specification command is sent.

  Further, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (design designation command) indicating whether or not to be a big hit among the winning determination results, and a determination result of the type of the big hit. In this embodiment, in display processing at the time of winning (see FIG. 16) described later, the microcomputer 560 for game control is any display result at the start winning (off, normal big hit, definite variation big hit, sudden definite variation big hit, small hit) Determine if Then, a value for designating the display result as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit it to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 12, in this embodiment, the EXT data is set according to whether or not a big hit is made, and the type of the big hit, and a symbol designation command is transmitted. For example, when it is determined that "due" is selected at the start winning combination, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) in which "00 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Also, for example, when it is determined that “normal big hit” is to be made, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that it becomes a “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that "the sudden probability big hit", the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set to the EXT data. Also, for example, when it is determined that "small hit" will be, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data.

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A 001 to A 003 (H) are presentation control commands (big hit start designation commands: fan fare designation commands) for designating a start of the big hit game by displaying the fan fare screen. The jackpot start designation command includes a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start designation 2 designation command, and a small hit / suspiciously definite variation jackpot start designation command according to the type of jackpot. Although the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly transmits a fanfare designation command for a definite big hit start designation when it is a big hit suddenly, it does not send a fan fare designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) showing a display of a number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening of the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A 301 (H) displays the big hit end screen, that is, specifies the end of the big hit game, and specifies that it was usually a big hit with a production control command (big hit end 1 specified command: ending 1 specified command) is there. The command A 302 (H) displays the big hit end screen, that is, specifies the end of the big hit game, and specifies that it was a definite variation big hit by the effect control command (big hit end 2 designated command: ending 2 designated command) is there. The command A 303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden definite positive big hit end designation command: ending 3 specified command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden end of the big hit. Although the gaming control microcomputer 560 suddenly transmits an ending designation command for a definite odd jackpot end designation when it is a big hit, it is configured not to send an ending designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

  The command B 000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is the normal state. The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (time reduction state specification command) for specifying that the gaming state is the time reduction state (does not include the probability change state). The command B 002 (H) is an effect control command (probable change state specification command) for specifying that the gaming state is a definite change state.

  The command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number designation command) for specifying the first pending storage number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the first pending storage number. The command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number designation command) for specifying the second pending storage number. “XX” in the command C1XX (H) indicates the second pending storage number.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. Do.

  For example, microcomputer 560 for game control designates the fluctuation pattern of the production design every time there is a starting winning and variable display of special symbols is started in first special symbol display 8a or second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and another command form may be used. For example, a control command consisting of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used

  In addition, as a method of sending out the effect control command, the effect control command data is outputted to the effect control substrate 80 from the main substrate 31 via the relay substrate 77 one byte at a time by eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) take-in signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing take-in of effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of taking in 1-byte data by interrupt processing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed on the first special symbol display 8a in a variable display (variation) of the effect design corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the second special Image display that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the production symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol in the symbol display 8b, and the image display that performs the presentation with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When controlling the rendering components such as the device 9, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the rendering control microcomputer 100 can be prevented from increasing.

  FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing an example of a program for special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, if the first starting opening switch 13a for detecting that the gaming ball has won in the first starting winning opening 13 is turned on, or the game ball is in the second starting winning opening 14 in the special symbol process processing If the second start opening switch 14a for detecting winning has been turned on, that is, if the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, the start opening switch passing processing Are executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second start opening switch 14a is not turned on, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes of steps S300 to S310 are the following processes.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the number of held memories buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is considered as a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

  Fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol Decide to do. Also, start the fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol variation processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting processing has elapsed (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is stepped It is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to S304.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. Further, control for transmitting a symbol determination designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, when the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. Note that the effect control microcomputer 100 controls so that the effect pattern is stopped in the effect display device 9 when the symbol determination designating command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is five. In the special winning opening open processing, control is performed to open the special winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S306. The big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the big winning opening opening pre-processing is also processing for starting a big hit game.

  Large winning opening open processing (step S306): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. Control for transmitting the effect control command of round display in the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, processing for confirming establishment of closing condition of the big winning opening, and the like are performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all rounds have been completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to step S307.

  Big hit end processing (step S307): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing is performed to set a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag). Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. The small hit opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the small hit opening pre-processing is also a processing to start a small hit game.

  Small hit open processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is nine. Perform processing such as confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 (decimal) in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. A control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of step S312. In the starting opening switch passing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the first starting opening switch 13a is in the on state (step S1211). If the 1st starting opening switch 13a is not an ON state, it will transfer to step S1222. If the first start port switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the first number of pending storages has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first pending storage for counting the first number of pending storages) Whether the value of the number counter is 4 or not is confirmed (step S1212). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1222.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1213) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1214). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the combined hold storage number counter in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the order of winning for the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S1215).

  In this embodiment, when the first starting opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when the gaming ball starts starting winning in the first starting winning opening 13), data indicating "first" is set, When the second starting opening switch 14a is turned on (that is, when the gaming ball starts starting winning in the second starting winning opening 14), data indicating "second" is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first starting port switch 13 a is turned on in the storage-preferring specific information storage area (pending specific area). When the 2 start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating the "second". In this case, when there is no corresponding pending storage, 00 (H) is set in the pending storage specific information storage area (pending specific area).

  FIG. 15A is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of the suspension storage specification information storage area (storage suspension area). As shown in FIG. 15A, in the hold specific area, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total hold memory number counter is secured. Note that FIG. 15A shows an example in which the value of the combined pending storage number counter is five. As shown in FIG. 15A, in the hold specific area, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total hold memory number counter is secured, and the first start winning opening 13 or the first start winning opening 13 2) Based on the winning on the start winning opening 14, data indicating that it is "first" or "second" is set in the winning order. Therefore, the order of winning on the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 is stored in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area). The hold specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes processing for extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 15B) (see FIG. Step S1216). In the process of step S1216, a hardware R random number random number (big hit determination random number) and a software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1 and fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted and stored. The variation pattern determination random number (Random 3) is not extracted in the starting opening switch passage process (at the time of starting winning combination) and stored in advance in the storage area, but the variation of the first special symbol is stored. For example, in the variation pattern setting process described later, the value may be extracted from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). May be extracted directly.

  FIG. 15B is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of an area (pending buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 15B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first number of pending storages is secured in the first pending storage buffer. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are hardware random numbers random R (big hit determination random numbers), software random numbers big hit type determination random numbers (random 1), and fluctuation. A random number for pattern determination (random 3) is stored. The first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect rendering process in which the fluctuation display result and fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed is determined at the time of starting winning (step S1217). And CPU56 performs control which transmits the 1st storage reserve number designation command to microcomputer 100 for presentation control based on the value of the 1st suspension storage count counter, and then, based on the decision result of the at the time of winning a prize processing design Control is performed to transmit the designated command to the effect control microcomputer 100, and then control is performed to send a benefit determination result specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (step S1218). ).

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 executes the process of step S 1218 regardless of the gaming state (high probability state or high base state, big hit gaming state or not), Every time the first start winning opening 13 gets a start winning, it always transmits both the first reserved storage number specifying command and the winning judgment determination result specifying command to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in accordance with the start winning combination in which the game balls have won in the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. However, the variable display of either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be preferentially executed. For example, when it is shifted to the high base state, it is easy to start winning at the second starting winning opening 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15 and the second reserved memory is easily accumulated, so the second special symbol The variable display may be performed with priority. In this case, the process of step S1215 can be omitted, and the pending storage specific information storage area (pending specific area) shown in FIG. 15A becomes unnecessary. Further, in this case, the CPU 56 is not in the high base state (when the time saving flag is not set) and is not in the big hit game, and the winning time based on the starting winning in the first start winning opening 13 The effect processing (step S1217) may be performed. That is, when the condition is not satisfied, the execution of the winning a prize production process (step S1217) is limited, and a pre-reading effect (for details, for anticipating that the display result of the specific variable display becomes a big hit or a super reach) It may be made not to execute (described later). In the configuration where priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, in the gaming state where it is easy to get a start winning at the second start winning opening 14, the variation of the first special symbol based on the starting winning for the first start winning opening 13. Since the display may continue to be delayed, there is a possibility that even if the pre-reading effect is executed, the variable display of the advance notice object is not easily executed. However, by limiting the execution of the winning a prize production process (step S 1217), it is possible to prevent the first starting winning a prize port 13 from performing the pre-reading effect based on the starting prize winning, and such a state is avoided. be able to. In addition, by limiting the effect processing during winning in the high base state or the big hit game, it is possible to prevent the game from being performed in a state where it is possible to recognize that the big hit storage is stored. In addition, it is confirmed by the value of the special symbol process flag, for example, whether or not a big hit game is being played. In that case, the CPU 56 determines that a big hit is in progress when the value of the special symbol process flag is any one of 5 to 7. Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 side always performs a prize-time effect processing, and the effect control microcomputer 100 side determines whether or not a high base state and a big hit game are being performed, The execution of the pre-reading effect may be limited.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether the second start port switch 14a is in the on state (step S1222). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the on state, the process ends. If the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the second number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending storage for counting the second number of pending storages) Whether the value of the number counter is 4 or not is confirmed (step S1223). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1224) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1225). In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in the area corresponding to the value of the total suspension storage number counter in the suspension storage specific information storage area (preservation specific area) (step S1226).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts the values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 20B) Step S1227). In the process of step S1227, a hardware R random number random number (big hit determination random number) or a big hit type determination random number (random 1) and fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3) which are software random numbers are extracted, It is stored in the save area. The variation pattern determination random number (Random 3) is not extracted in the start opening switch passage process (at start winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of variation of the second special symbol. May be For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a prize effect process (step S1228). And CPU56 performs control which transmits the 2nd reservation memory number designation command to microcomputer 100 for presentation control based on the value of the 2nd reservation memory number counter, and then, based on the decision result of the at the time of winning a prize processing design Control is performed to transmit the designated command to the effect control microcomputer 100, and then control is performed to send a benefit determination result specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (step S1229) ).

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 executes the process of step S1229 regardless of the gaming state (high probability state or high base state, big hit gaming state or not), Every time the second start winning opening 14 gets a start winning, it always transmits both the second reserved storage number specifying command and the winning judgment determination result specifying command to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the at-a-prize effect processing at steps S1217 and S1218. In the prize effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is checked whether they match (step S220). In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing, which will be described later, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, the big hit type or the variation pattern setting processing However, before the variation display based on the start winning is started at the timing when the game ball is started to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. By executing the prize presentation processing, it is confirmed in advance which display result (は, normal big hit, positive change big hit, sudden positive change big hit, small hit) and which fluctuation pattern will be obtained. By doing so, the display result and the change pattern are predicted in advance before the change display of the effect pattern is executed, and as described later, the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result at the time of winning. The pre-reading effect of giving notice of becoming a big hit or super reach, or a symbol (for example, a reach symbol or a pseudo-series symbol) displayed in a variable display corresponding to the winning is executed.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 determines whether a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state is set or not. It confirms (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the jackpot determination value at the probability change shown in the right column of FIG. Are checked to see if they match (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays will be executed from when it is confirmed in step S221 whether or not it is a positive change condition at the start winning combination and the variable display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. There is. Therefore, the game state changes (for example, the change start) until the variable display based on the start change is actually started after it is confirmed in step S221 whether the start change is a definite change state or not. In the case where a big change has occurred before, it has changed from the normal state to the big change state. Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the start winning is not necessarily the same as the gaming state (see step S61 described later) determined at the start of fluctuation.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the big hit determination value at the time of definite variation (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 and FIG. The small hit determination values shown in (C) and (C) are compared, and it is confirmed whether they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning at presentation processing (refer to step S 1217) is executed in the start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 14) It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in (B). In the case where there is a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning at presentation processing (see step S1228) is executed in the start opening switch passing processing shown in FIG. 14), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hitting determination value set in the small hitting determination table (for the second special symbol) shown.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data "00 (H)" indicating that it becomes "off" as the symbol designation command Processing is performed (S223a). Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step S224). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines in step S224 whether the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state (specifically, whether the time short flag is set). A plurality of variable displays are executed from when it is confirmed in step S224 whether or not it is a definite change state or a time saving state at the start winning combination, and until the variable display based on the start winning combination is actually started. There is a possibility of Therefore, the game state changes in the period from when it is confirmed in step S224 whether or not it is a definite change state or a time saving state at the start winning combination, and until the variable display based on the start winning combination is actually started (for example, If there is a probability change big hit before the start of the change, the normal state changes to the probability change state. Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S224 at the start winning combination and the gaming state determined at the start of fluctuation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily coincide with each other.

  Then, the CPU 56 selects a field of the fluctuation pattern determination table according to the determination result of step S224 (step S225). Specifically, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, the CPU 56 selects the "out (time short)" field of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. When it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state, the "off" field of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9 is selected.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 designates EXT data "04 (H)" indicating that the "small hit" will be a symbol designation command The process to set to is performed (S223 b). Next, the CPU 56 selects the "suddenly probability big hit / small hit" field of the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. (Step S226).

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of the big hit based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227. Is determined (step S227). In this case, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning at presentation processing (see step S1217) is executed in the start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 14), the CPU 56 shown in FIG. Using the jackpot classification determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a shown in (D), it is judged whether the jackpot classification is "normally big hit", "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit". In the case where there is a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning at presentation processing (see step S1228) is executed in the start opening switch passing processing shown in FIG. 14), as shown in FIG. A big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b shown is used to determine whether the big hit type is "normal big hit", "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit".

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data according to the determination result of the big hit type as a symbol designation command (S227a). In this case, when it is determined that "normal big hit" is to be performed, the CPU 56 performs processing of setting EXT data "01 (H)" indicating that "normal big hit" is to be made to the symbol designation command. Further, when it is determined that the "certain variation big hit" is to be performed, the CPU 56 performs processing of setting the EXT data "02 (H)" indicating that the "probability variation big hit" is to be made to the symbol designation command. If it is determined that "suddenly a probability change big hit" is found, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data "03 (H)" indicating that "sudden change probability big hit" will be made as a symbol designation command.

  Then, the CPU 56 selects a field of the fluctuation pattern determination table according to the jackpot type determined in step S227. (Step S228). Specifically, when the CPU 56 determines that “normal big hit” or “probably big hit”, the “normal big hit / probably big hit” field of the variation pattern determination table is selected. Also, if it is determined that "suddenly probability variation big hit", the "sudden probability variation big hit / small hit" field of the variation pattern determination table is selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a variation pattern using the fields of the variation pattern determination table set in steps S225, S226, and S228 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 (step S229).

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the determined fluctuation pattern in the winning determination result specifying command (step S230). Specifically, the CPU 56 wins any value of “00 (H)” to “51 (H)” as shown in FIG. 12 according to which variation pattern is determined in step S229. A process is performed to set the EXT data of the hour determination result specification command.

  For example, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning at presentation processing (see step S1217A is executed in the starting opening switch passing processing shown in FIG. 14)), "not reach in step S229 When it is determined that the variation pattern of "outside" is to be set, processing is performed to set "02 (H)" to the EXT data of the winning combination determination result designation command composed of MODE data "95 (H)". If it is determined in step S 229 that the fluctuation pattern type is “pseudo ream 3 super”, it is 12 (H) as the EXT data of the winning time determination result specification command configured with MODE data “95 (H)”. ) Is set.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined using the same variation pattern determination table even if the number of pending storages is different, but a different variation pattern determination table may be used according to the number of pending storages. . In this case, regardless of the number of pending storages, for example, it is determined from the variation pattern determination random number (or the variation pattern type determination random number) whether or not a variation pattern with normal reach or super reach is obtained. It is also possible to transmit a winning judgment determination result specification command based on that, and it is determined that a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern for performing a specific reach effect, a fluctuation pattern of a specific number of pseudo sequences, etc.) At the same time, a winning determination result specifying command indicating a determination result may be transmitted. Also, for example, it may be determined whether the display result is “normal big hit” or “probable variation big hit”, and a prize determination result specifying command indicating the determination result may be transmitted.

  FIGS. 17 and 18 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal processing (step S300) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined pending storage number counter. If the total number of pending storages is 0, the processing ends.

  If the total number of pending storages is not 0, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the first data of the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 15A) is data indicating “first”. (Step S52). If the first data set in the hold specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 56 selects the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "second" is set to a flag indicating whether the special symbol process process is being performed for the special symbol or the second special symbol is performed (step S54). If the first data set in the hold specific area is data representing "first" (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets data representing "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S53). ).

  In this embodiment, the process of steps S52 to S54 is executed, and in this embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol according to the starting winning order in which the gaming balls have won in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 Display or variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in accordance with the start winning combination in which the game balls have won in the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Although the case where it is shown is shown, you may constitute so that priority may be given to change display of either one of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. For example, when priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, it is confirmed in step S52 whether or not the second pending storage number in the second pending storage number buffer is one or more, and one or more. For example, the process proceeds to step S54, and if 0, the process proceeds to step S53.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number 1 of pending storages indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the random numbers stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage number buffer. Then, it is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and in the pending specific area and the first pending storage buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the respective saving areas in the pending specific area and the second pending storage buffer are shifted. Do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 55 The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1. In addition, the CPU 56 sums up the values (the value indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of reserved storages = m (m = 2 to 8) in the suspension specific area. It stores in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages = m-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4. Further, the order in which the respective values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1 to 8.

  When the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer in step S56, the first special symbol hold storage display 18a is based on the count value of the hold storage counter decremented. Alternatively, control is also performed to change the display of the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b.

  Then, after the CPU 56 stores the count value of the combined pending storage number counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (step S57), the CPU 56 decreases the value of the combined pending storage number by one. That is, the count value of the total number of pending storages is decremented by 1 (step S58). Note that the CPU 56 stores the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the pending storage number designation command of the special symbol pointer to the microcomputer 100 for effect control based on the value of the pending storage number counter of the special symbol pointer after subtraction. (Step S59). In this case, when the value indicating “first” is set to the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first number of pending storage number designation command. When the special symbol pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating the "first" indicating that the processing is performed targeting the first start winning opening 13; that is, the processing indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol Data indicating "" or data indicating "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is, "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be made common to the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for the big hit determination stored in advance in the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer extracted in step S214A of the first starting opening switch passing processing or in step S214B of the second starting opening switch passing processing. Read the random number and make a big hit judgment. The big hit judgment module compares the predetermined big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (see FIG. 8) with the jackpot judgment random number, and executes processing for deciding to be a big hit or a small hit if they match. Is a program that That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  In the process of jackpot determination, when the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a big hit is configured to be higher than in the non-probability change state (normal game state and time saving state) ing. Specifically, the probability variation time jackpot determination table (the table on the right side of FIG. 8A in ROM 54 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are probability variation A normal-time big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set smaller than the big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and when the gaming state is a definite change state, processing of the determination of the big hit using the big change determination table at the positive change time, the gaming state is normal When the gaming state or the time saving state, the processing of the determination of the big hit is performed using the big hit determination table at normal times. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  In addition, confirmation of whether the present game state is a definite change state is performed by whether the positive change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability change state, and is reset when ending the probability change state. Specifically, it is determined to be a big hit or sudden big hit, is set in the processing to end the big hit game, and when it is determined to be a big hit, the variable display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It is reset at the timing.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). And perform a small hit determination process. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8B) Use) to decide whether to make a small hit or not. In addition, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", it is determined whether or not the small hit is made using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Fig. 8C. . Then, when it is determined to make the small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S63), and the process proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is a loss, the process directly proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (D). When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (E).

  Next, using the selected big hit type determination table, the CPU 56 uses the type (“normal big hit”, “probable variation”) corresponding to the value matching the value of the random number (random 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area. A "big hit" or "a sudden definite big hit" is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the big hit type stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, which is extracted in step S214A of the first start mouth switch passage processing or in step S214B of the second start mouth switch passage processing. Read the random number and decide the big hit type. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Suddenly, the probability that a big hit is selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined type of the big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is "suddenly, there is a definite variation big hit", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an out pattern is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, according to the determination result of the big hit type, it decides the stop design of the special symbol “1”, “3”, “7” which becomes the big hit symbol. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be "suddenly positive variation big hit", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and when "big hit" is determined, the "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol And, when it is decided to be "probable variation big hit", "7" is decided to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing variation pattern setting processing (step S301) in the special symbol process processing. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the “normal big hit / probably variable big hit” field of the variation pattern determination table if the big hit type is the normal big hit or the positive odds (Y in step S92). (Step S93) If the jackpot type is not a normal big hit or a definite variation big hit (N in Step S92), the "Suddenly Certainly Big Variation / Small Hit" field of the variation pattern determination table is selected (Step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S93). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the "suddenly probability variation big / small hit" field of the variation pattern determination table (step S96). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  If the small hit flag is not set either, the CPU 56 confirms whether the time short flag indicating the short time state is set (step S97). Note that the time saving flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the time saving state (including when the probability changing state is entered), and is reset when the time saving state is ended. Specifically, it is usually decided to be a big hit, a definite big hit or suddenly a big hit, is set in the processing to end the big hit game, the timing of having saved the number of short time, or the variation of the special symbol when it is decided to be a big hit It is reset at the timing to finish the display and stop display the stop symbol. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S97), the CPU 56 selects the "off (time saving)" field of the variation pattern determination table (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S97), the CPU 56 selects the "out" field of the fluctuation pattern determination table (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 3 (random pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer) (step S101), and performs the processing of steps S93, S94, S96, S98 or S99. The variation pattern is determined to be any one of a plurality of types by referring to the field of the variation pattern determination table selected in (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Also, the variation of the special symbol is started (step S105). For example, the start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process of step S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S106). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S107).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the effect control command (see FIG. 10) of the display result 1 specification to the display result 5 specification according to the determined type, small hit, or removal of the determined big hit. Control to Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the jackpot flag is set, if the type of the jackpot is a definite variation jackpot, control is performed to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S111 and S112). In addition, it can be specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02" or not. Further, when the type of the big hit is a definite positive big hit suddenly, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designated command (steps S113 and S114). In addition, it can be specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "03" or not. Then, when it is neither the definite variation big hit nor the sudden variation big hit (in other words, it is usually the large hit), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 2 designation command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S116), that is, when the small hit flag is off, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation in progress processing (step S303) in the special symbol process processing. During special symbol variation processing, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S125), and when the variation time timer times out (step S126), the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop processing (step S304) The updated value is updated (step S127). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (step S304) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of step S32 to end the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b Control to derive and display the stop symbol is performed (step S131). In addition, when the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a is ended, and the second symbol is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b is ended. Further, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S132). Then, if the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S140 (step S133).

  When the big hit flag is set, if it is set, the CPU 56 resets the definite variation flag indicating that it is a definite variation state, and the short time flag indicating that it is a short time condition (step S134), and effects control is performed. Control to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the microcomputer 100 is performed (step S135). Specifically, when the type of the jackpot is normally a jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. If the type of the big hit is a definite variation big hit, send a big hit start 2 designated command. If the type of the jackpot is a sudden oddity big hit, send a small hit / sudden definite big hit start specification command. It should be noted that whether the type of the big hit is usually a big hit, a definite big hit or a sudden big hit is determined based on the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer) .

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S136).

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S137). Further, the number of opening times (for example, 15 times in the case of a normal big hit or a probability variation big hit, 2 times in the case of a sudden probability variation big hit) is set in the special winning opening number-of-openings counter (step S138). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S139).

  In step S140, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not a positive change flag indicating that it is a positive change state is set. If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S141). If the time saving flag is set (that is, if it is controlled only in the time saving state without a definite variation state), the value of the time saving counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be varied in the time saving state 1 is performed (step S142).

  Next, when the value of the time reduction number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S144), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S145). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S146).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether the small hit flag is set (step S147). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / suspiciously positive change big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S148). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S149). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S150). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting start pre-processing (step S308) (step S151).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N of step S147), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S152).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S160), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and control to transmit a big hit end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, when it is a big hit, it sends a big hit end 1 specified command, and when it is a definite variation big hit, it sends a big hit end 2 specified command, and when it is a definite variation big hit suddenly, a small hit / suddenly Send a definite variation big hit end specification command. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the image display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process is ended.

  In step S164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by one. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 confirms whether the type of the big hit is a definite big hit or a sudden positive big hit (step S166). In addition, whether it is a definite variation big hit or sudden definite variation big hit, specifically, whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02” to “03” It can judge by confirming. If neither the probability variation big hit nor the sudden probability variation big hit (that is, usually a big hit), the CPU 56 sets the time saving flag to shift the gaming state to the time saving state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction number counter for counting the time reduction number (step S168). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the time saving state designating command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S169). Then, the process proceeds to step S173.

  If the probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag to shift the gaming state to the probability variation state (step S170). Further, the CPU 56 sets a time saving flag (step S171). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the probability change state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S172). Then, the process proceeds to step S173.

  In this embodiment, the short time flag set in steps S167 and S171 is also used to determine whether to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 or to increase the number of times of opening. In this case, specifically, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time saving flag is set when the variation display result of the normal symbol is hit in the normal symbol process processing (see step S27). If it is, control is performed to open the variable winning prize ball device 15 by lengthening the opening time or increasing the number of times of opening. In addition, the short time flag set in steps S167 and S171 is used to determine whether or not the variation time of the special symbol is to be shortened.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S173).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 as effect control means. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control (step S 701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control processing.

  In the effect control process, first, the effect control CPU 101 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process (step S705). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 9.

  Next, random number update processing is performed to update the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S706). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 25 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main substrate 31. As shown in FIG. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is formed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area the received command is to be stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value of 0-11. The ring buffer type may not necessarily be used.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 10 and 11) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  26 to 27 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). Although the effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). Note that when read out, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 stores the change pattern command in the change pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S622). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S623).

  If the received effect control command is the display result designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command) in the RAM. The command is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is the symbol determination designating command (step S627), the effect control CPU 101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is the first hold storage number specification command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 performs first hold storage of the second byte data (EXT data) of the first hold storage number specification command. The number is stored in the first reserved storage number storage area as a number (step S652).

  If the received effect control command is the second hold storage number specification command (step S654), the effect control CPU 101 performs second hold storage of the second byte data (EXT data) of the second hold storage number specification command. The number is stored in the second reserved storage number storage area as a number (step S655).

  If the received effect control command is any of the symbol designation commands (step S661), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received symbol designation command in the start winning game command storage area in association with the total number of pending storages (Step S662).

  Next, if the received effect control command is one of the winning determination results designated commands (step S664), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received winning determination results designated command in the start winning combination command storage area. It stores in the storage area matched with the number (step S665), and performs pre-reading effect determination processing (step S671).

  In this embodiment, the combined pending storage count is the first pending storage count stored in the first pending storage count storage area and the second pending storage count stored in the second pending storage count storage area. It is obtained by summing up The first pending storage number is updated in step S652 after receiving the first pending storage number specification command, and the second pending storage number is updated in step S655 after receiving the second pending storage number specification command. Therefore, the total number of pending storages is also updated at the same timing. Further, the symbol designation command is transmitted after transmitting the first reserved storage number designation command in step S1218 of the starting opening switch passage processing, and is transmitted after transmitting the second pending storage number specification command in step S1229. Ru. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the symbol designation command after updating the total number of pending storages. In addition, the winning determination determination result designation command is transmitted after the symbol designation command is transmitted in step S1218 of the starting opening switch passage process, and is transmitted after the symbol designation command is transmitted in step S1229. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 updates the total number of pending storages, and further stores the symbol designation command in the start prize winning command storage area, and then receives the winning prize determination result designation command.

  In addition, the CPU for effect control 101, according to the symbol designation command stored in the start winning command storage area, the variable display corresponding to the symbol designation command indicates which display result (disappeared, usually big hit, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, Whether it will be a small hit) can be determined prior to the start of the variable display, and the in-winning determination result specification command stored in the start-up winning command storage area can be used in the in-winning determination result specification command Change pattern of corresponding variable display (for example, whether it becomes reach or not, either normal reach or super reach if it becomes reach, presence or absence of pseudo-series effect in the case of reach, temporary with pseudo-series effect The number of stops etc.) can be determined before the variable display is started. Further, the commands stored in the start winning command storage area are deleted in order from the one set in the effect symbol variation start process (the timing when the process of step S1811 is executed, etc.) described later.

  FIG. 27A is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a region (starting winning command command storage region) for storing the winning determination result. In the start winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 8) corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total number of pending storage numbers (first pending storage number + second pending storage number) are secured. There is. In this embodiment, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14, the command of the symbol designating command and the winning judgment determination command is set within one timer interruption. Sent by Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, a storage area is secured so that the symbol designating command and the winning determination result designating command can be stored in association with each other. . In addition, when it is constituted so that priority is given to change display of any one of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, in order to distinguish which prize decision result at the time of winning, The first start winning command storage area for storing the winning judgment result at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 and the second winning judgment result for the start winning at the second start winning opening 14 The start winning combination command storage area may be prepared. In this case, in the first start winning command storage area, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured. Further, in the second start winning command storage area, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. Further, in this case, the received symbol specifying command and the winning determination result specifying command are stored in the first start winning command storage area and the second start winning command storage area. The start winning command storage area (first start winning command storage area and second start winning command storage area) is formed in the RAM provided in the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, when there is a start winning on first start winning opening 13 or second start winning opening 14, the above-mentioned symbol designating command and winning judgment determination result designating command are performed within one timer interrupt. At the same time, the first pending storage number specification command or the second pending storage number specification command is also transmitted as a set. Therefore, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, the first holding memory number specifying command or the second holding memory number specifying command is also stored in association with the symbol specifying command and the winning time determination result specifying command. You may do it. According to this, in the effect control CPU 101, each symbol designation command and each winning time determination result designation command correspond to winning to any winning opening of the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. It becomes possible to identify if there is any.

  In the pre-reading effect determination processing (step S671), when the winning determination result specifying command is stored in the start winning command storage area (step S665), the symbol specifying command corresponding to the storage area is stored. If it is confirmed (that is, one set of commands is stored without error), it may be executed.

  If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S683). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

  Next, the pre-reading effect will be described. The pre-reading effect is executed before the variable display to be the target of the presentation is started, and the variable display to be the target of the presentation is a big hit, or a specific fluctuation (for example, whether the reach state is established or the pseudo It is a notice effect that gives a notice that it will be executed etc.). In this embodiment, as the pre-reading effect, in the total hold storage display unit 18c, a display mode different from the normal display mode (hereinafter, the normal mode) in the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold memory) to be notified. An effect displayed in (a special aspect or a first special aspect or a second special aspect which will be described later, or a symbol target aspect which will be described later, or a symbol first aspect or a symbol second aspect) is performed.

  Here, in this embodiment, there are cases where a normal pre-reading effect is executed and a case where a symbol pre-reading effect is executed as pre-reading effect. The normal look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the variable display to be the target of the effect, and the possibility that the variable display to be the target of the effect will be a big hit is the variable display (a random number extracted at the start winning prize) It is an effect suggested by the mode of the suspension display corresponding to). There are a first special mode shown in FIG. 46 (c) and a second special mode shown in FIG. 46 (d) as modes of the hold display in the normal pre-reading effect. Also, there is a special mode shown in FIG. 46 (b) as a mode that suggests changing to the first special mode or the second special mode.

  In addition, the symbol pre-reading effect is executed before the fluctuation display which is the object of production is started, in specified fluctuation timing which becomes the object of the production, for example the timing where the reach state is formed or the timing of temporary stop It is an effect which suggests the displayed symbol by the mode of the suspension display corresponding to the said fluctuation display (random number extracted at the time of starting winning a prize). As modes of suspension display in the symbol pre-reading effect, there are a first pattern of symbols shown in FIG. 46 (f) and a second pattern of symbols shown in FIG. 46 (g). In addition, there is a symbol target aspect shown in FIG. 46 (e) as an aspect that suggests changing to the symbol first aspect or the symbol second aspect.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing pre-reading effect determination processing. In the pre-reading effect determination process, the CPU 101 for production control checks whether or not the pre-reading effect restriction flag indicating that the execution of pre-reading effect is restricted (step S67101). The pre-reading effect restriction flag is set in step S67111 or S67211 described later. If the pre-read effect restriction flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 causes the total hold storage display unit 18c to display a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the normal mode (step S67105 f). For example, when the first to fifth hold display of the total hold storage display unit 18c is displayed, the effect control CPU 101 controls to display the sixth hold display in the normal mode. . In this embodiment, the hold display of the normal mode is shown in the form of “o” as shown in FIG. 46 (a).

  If the prefetch effect restriction flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 uses the previous winning time determination result specifying command (except for the winning time determination result specifying command received this time) stored in the start winning time command storage area. All are extracted (step S67102).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not all the extracted winning determination determination result designation commands indicate "non-reach" (step S67103). In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 is a value indicating that all of the extracted winning determination determination result designation commands in step S67103 are “shortened non-reach out” or “non-reach out” (specifically, , “9501 (H)” or “9502 (H)” (see FIG. 12) (that is, it is checked whether or not outliers are not accompanied by reach).

  If all of the winning combination determination result designation commands extracted in step S67103 are commands indicating "non-reach", the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S67104. On the other hand, when all the winning combination determination result designation commands extracted are not commands indicating "non reach", the effect control CPU 101 causes the total hold storage display unit 18c to display a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage. Display in the normal mode (step S67105 f). That is, in this embodiment, when there is a pending storage in which the variable display accompanied by the reach effect is performed, the preread effect is not executed based on the newly received winning time determination result specification command. In addition to the example shown in FIG. 28, even when there is a pending storage in which change display with reach effect is performed, pre-reading effect is executed based on the newly received winning time determination result specification command. May be

  In step S67104, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the latest winning time determination result specification command (the winning time determination result specification command received this time) stored in the start winning time command storage area, and the extracted winning time determination result Based on the designated command, it is determined whether or not to execute the preread effect (step S67104).

  In this embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, using the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 31 (A).

  FIG. 31 (A) is an explanatory view showing a pre-reading effect execution determination table. Although the judgment value corresponding to the decision item (“Perform pre-reading effect” or “Do not perform pre-reading effect”) is assigned to the pre-reading effect execution determination table for each winning judgment result specification command, FIG. In the example shown in A), in order to simplify the explanation, the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown. For example, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and determines a determination item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned (“execute the pre-reading effect” or “Do not execute preread effect”). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 31 (A), the numerical values corresponding to "execute pre-read effect" and "do not execute pre-read effect" in each winning judgment determination result command execute "pre-read effect" as the decision item. It shows the percentage (%) that "do" or "do not execute pre-reading effect" is selected.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 31 (A), the final display mode determination table for normal pre-reading effect shown in FIG. 31 (B), the symbol shown in FIG. 31 (C) The final display mode determination table for the prefetch effect, the prefetch effect pattern decision table shown in FIG. 32, the reach symbol decision table shown in FIG. 33, the predictive effect change timing decision table shown in FIG. 34, and the suggested effect mode decision table shown in FIG. Also, although the judgment value is actually assigned, the proportion of the judgment value assigned to simplify the explanation is shown. In addition, in steps S67106 and S67206, S67107 and S67207, S67207a, S67108 and S67208, S67110 and S67210, and S67115 and S67215, which will be described later, in which these tables are used, the CPU 101 for effect control, for example, A display mode or a symbol notice mode, a look-ahead effect pattern, a reach pattern, a change timing (number of shifts) or a random number for determining a effect mode of a suggestive effect is extracted, and a judgment value corresponding to the extracted random number is assigned Decide on.

  In step S67104, the effect control CPU 101 determines, based on the extracted latest winning time determination result specification command, the ratio determined for each winning time determination result specification command in the prefetch effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 31 (A). , Decide whether to perform pre-reading effect. For example, when the winning combination determination result designation command indicates that "shortening non-reach is out", the effect control CPU 101 determines not to execute the pre-reading effect at a rate of 100%. In addition, for example, when it is indicated that it is “per simulated ream 3 super” with the winning a prize decision result designated command, production control CPU101 decides to execute pre-reading production with ratio of 99%.

  The characteristic thing in the prefetch presentation effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 31A is that the display result is displayed as compared to the case where the display result is "off" (corresponding to the winning judgment result 1 specification to the winning judgment result 7 specification). If the result is “normal big hit” or “probable big hit” (equivalent to the winning determination result 8 specification to the winning determination result 12 specification), the determination value is higher so that the rate at which the prefetch effect is performed is higher It is set. Further, it is characteristic in the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 31 (A) that even if the display result is the same, the one with reach expectation with high degree of expectation is performed (for example, super reach is performed rather than normal reach) However, the judgment value is set such that the rate at which the pre-reading effect is performed is high. By providing such a feature, when pre-reading effect is executed, it is expected that the rate of occurrence of big hit in the variable display of the advance notice object is increased and the big hit is expected as compared with the case where pre-reading effect is not executed. It is possible to increase the rate at which reach effect with a high degree is performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the preread effect is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 31 (A), it is determined that the pre-reading effect is to be executed at a ratio of 1% even when "not reach out" in the prize determination result specification command, but "not reach" (" In the case of “short non-reach out” or “non-reach out”, it may not be determined to perform the pre-reading effect. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 31 (A), a determination value (ratio) is set for determining whether or not to execute pre-reading effect for each variation pattern indicated by the winning determination result specification command. For example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect every display result (for example, "off", "normal big hit" or "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit" or "small hit") indicated by the prize determination result specifying command A determination value (percentage) may be set to determine the value.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 101 determines that the pre-reading effect is to be executed (Y in step S67105), the process proceeds to step S67105a. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is not executed (N in step S67105), the effect control CPU 101 causes the total hold storage display unit 18c to display the new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the normal mode Step S67105f).

  In step S67105a, the CPU for effect control 101 sets the total number of pending storages in the counter for the combined pending storage number of effects for specifying the pending display to be the target of the pre-reading effect (step S67105a). The value of the combined holding memory number counter for effect is decremented by 1 in step S1802a of the effect symbol variation start process, and is used to specify the pending display to be the object of the pre-reading effect in steps S1802f and S1809. For example, when the value of the effect combination total storage number counter is 4, the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the fourth suspension display of the total storage position 18c is executed. In this embodiment, the combined pending storage count is the first pending storage count stored in the first pending storage count storage area and the second pending storage count stored in the second pending storage count storage area. It is obtained by summing up The first pending storage number is updated in step S652 after receiving the first pending storage number specification command, and the second pending storage number is updated in step S655 after receiving the second pending storage number specification command. Therefore, the total number of pending storages is also updated at the same timing. In addition, at the step S1218 of starting opening switch passing processing, the winning a prize decision result designated command is transmitted after sending the 1st pending memory number designated command, and in the step S1229, the 2nd pending memory number designated command was sent. Will be sent later. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the symbol designating command and the prize determination result designating command after updating the total number of pending storages.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 determines, as the pre-reading effect, which one of the normal pre-reading effect and the symbol pre-reading effect is to be executed (step S67105 b). Here, based on the latest winning judgment determination result designation command, when the winning judgment determination result designation command is the special winning judgment result 13 designation, it is decided to carry out the normal look-ahead effect If it is any one of the winning determinations 1 to 12 designated to indicate something other than a special hit, it is decided to execute the normal look-ahead effect at a rate of 50%, and executes the pattern read-out effect at a rate of 50% It shall be decided. In addition, although the judgment value is actually allocated to the table for determining whether the type of the pre-reading effect is the normal pre-reading effect or the symbol pre-reading effect, it is allocated to simplify the explanation. The ratio of the judgment value is shown.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the symbol pre-reading effect (step S67105 c). If it is determined to execute the normal pre-reading effect (N in step S67105 c), the normal pre-reading effect setting process shown in FIG. 29 is executed (step S67105 d). On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the symbol pre-reading effect (Y in step S67105 c), the symbol pre-reading effect setting process shown in FIG. 30 is executed (step S67105 e).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing normal pre-reading effect setting processing. In the normal look-ahead effect, the effect control CPU 101 determines in which display mode the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified in advance is to be displayed (step S67106). In this embodiment, special modes, a first special mode and a second special mode are provided in addition to the normal mode as the display mode of the hold display in the pre-reading effect. In this embodiment, the suspension display of the special mode is shown in a mode in which six lines are drawn outside the “o” as shown in FIG. 46 (b). Further, the hold display of the first special mode is shown in a mode in which "x" is included in "o" as shown in FIG. 46 (c). Further, the hold display of the second special mode is shown in a mode in which two “X” s are included in “○” as shown in FIG. 46 (d). However, as described later, the pending display displayed in the special mode changes from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode until the variable display based on the pending information corresponding to the pending display is started. Is displayed. Therefore, in step S67106, the final display mode is determined to be either the first special mode or the second special mode. Hereinafter, the first special mode and the second special mode may be collectively referred to as special modes.

  FIG. 31 (B) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table for normal pre-reading effect. In step S67106, the CPU for effect control 101 uses the final display mode determination table for the normal pre-reading effect shown in FIG. 31B to finally display the display mode (hereinafter also referred to as final display mode) Decide. Specifically, based on the extracted latest winning time determination result specification command, the final determination is made for each winning case determination result (display result of variation display) in the final display mode determination table for the look ahead effect normally, and the final Determine the display mode. For example, when it is indicated that the display result of the variable display is “off” in the winning determination result specification command (corresponding to the winning determination result 1 specification to the winning determination result 7 specification), for effect control The CPU 101 determines the final display mode as the first special mode at a rate of 80%. In addition, for example, when it is indicated that the display result of the variable display is “normal big hit” or “probable variation big hit” by the winning determination result specification command (in the winning determination result 8 specification to the winning determination result 12 specification) (Equivalent), the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode as the second special mode at a rate of 80%.

  What is characteristic in the final display mode determination table for the normal pre-reading effect shown in FIG. 31 (B) is that the display result is “off” (corresponding to the winning judgment result 1 specification to the winning judgment result 7 specification) The ratio when the display result is "normal big hit" or "probable variation big hit" (equivalent to the winning determination result 8 specification to the winning determination result 12 specification) is determined as the second special mode The determination value is set to be high. By providing such a feature, when the hold display is displayed in the second special mode, the rate at which the jackpot occurs in the variable display for the advance notice is higher than when it is displayed in the first special mode. can do. Therefore, the degree of expectation that the one displayed in the second special mode becomes a big hit can be made higher than the first special mode, and in which display mode the hold display is displayed when the pre-reading effect is executed Can be focused on

  In the example shown in FIG. 31 (B), each display result indicated by the prize judgment result specification command (“Attack”, “Normal big hit” or “Probably big hit” or “Suddenly big hit” or “Small hit”) The judgment value (percentage) for determining the final display mode is set in, for example, each fluctuation pattern indicated by the prize judgment result specification command in the same manner as the prefetch presentation execution execution determination table of FIG. The judgment value (ratio) for determining the final display mode may be set to. By doing so, when the pending display is displayed in the second special mode, in addition to increasing the rate at which the big hit occurs in the variable display of the advance notice, the rate at which reach effect with high expectation is performed Can also be high.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, two types of display modes of the first special mode and the second special mode are provided as final display modes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of display modes are provided, respectively. The degree of expectation may be different (the ratio selected depending on the display result may be different).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 determines an effect pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a pre-read effect pattern) of pre-reading effect in the normal pre-reading effect (step S67107).

  In this embodiment, a first pre-reading effect pattern and a second pre-reading effect pattern are provided as pre-reading effect patterns. In the first pre-read effect pattern in the normal pre-read effect, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the notice object is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode without being displayed in the special mode. . In addition, the first pre-reading effect pattern in the pre-reading effect normally is that the holding display corresponding to the fluctuation display (pending information) of the notice object at the timing of the start winning is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, The hold indication corresponding to the change indication (pending information) of the advance notice object changes from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode at an arbitrary shift timing until the subject variable indication (hold information) is started Including what is displayed. On the other hand, in the second look-ahead effect pattern in the normal look-ahead effect, the hold display corresponding to the change display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning, and any display until the change display of the notice target is started At the shift timing, the display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode.

  With the shift timing of the suspension display, the first suspension display in the total suspension storage display unit 18c is erased in the effect symbol variation start process to be described later, the remaining suspension display is shifted one by one, and the total suspension storage display It is the timing (specifically, the timing at which step S1811 is executed) of updating the display of the total number of pending storages in the unit 18c. For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the total hold storage display unit 18c are displayed, the first hold display is erased at the shift timing and the second hold display is displayed. The hold display is shifted to the first display area, the hold display displayed on the third is shifted to the second display area, and the hold display displayed on the fourth is the third display The hold display that has been shifted to the area and shifted to the fifth display is shifted to the fourth display area.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory view of a pre-reading effect pattern determination table. In step S67107, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the prefetch effect pattern based on the prefetch effect pattern determination table and the total number of pending storages. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 receives the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning combination determination result designation command (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big variation big hit" or In the case of "small hit" (that is, in the case of the winning determination result 8 specification to the winning determination result 13 specification), the hit predictive play effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 32A is used. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control controls the pre-reading effect pattern as the first pre-reading effect pattern and the second pre-reading effect pattern at a ratio determined for each total pending storage number in the hit pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide on either.

  Furthermore, when the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning judgment result specification command is “off” (ie, the winning judgment result 1 specification to the winning judgment result 7 specification), the effect control CPU 101 In the case of FIG. 32 (B), the hit pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control controls the pre-reading effect pattern as the first pre-reading effect pattern and the second pre-reading effect pattern at a rate determined for each total pending storage number in the out-of-time pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide on either.

  For example, the display result of the variable display indicated by the prize determination result specification command is hit (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big hit" or "small hit"), and the total number of pending storages is In the case of 2, the effect control CPU 101 determines the pre-reading effect pattern as the first pre-reading effect pattern at a rate of 35% and the second pre-reading effect pattern at a rate of 65%. In addition, for example, when the display result of the variable display indicated by the prize determination result specification command is “off” and the total number of pending storages is 2, the effect control CPU 101 performs 65% of the prefetch effect pattern The first pre-read effect pattern is determined at a rate of 35% and the second pre-read effect pattern is determined at a rate of 35%.

  The characteristic feature of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 32 is that the display result of the variable display hits (for example, “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” compared to the case where the display result of the variable display is “off”. The judgment value is set so that the proportion determined in the second pre-reading effect pattern is higher in the case of “suddenly a definite odd change big hit” or “small hit”. By providing such a feature, when the pre-reading effect is performed in the second pre-reading effect pattern (ie when the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the start winning combination, and then displayed in a special mode after being displayed ) When the pre-reading effect is performed in the first pre-reading effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode without being displayed in the special mode), the change display of the advance notice target The rate of occurrence of can be increased. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is “normal big hit” or “probable change big hit”, the rate at which the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode is high, so the prefetching effect is performed in the second pre-reading effect pattern (Ie, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the start winning combination and then displayed in a special mode), the hold display displayed in the special mode is more likely to be a big hit than the first special mode. The rate of change to the second special mode is high. Therefore, it is possible to focus attention on which pre-reading effect pattern is to be executed. Further, when the pre-reading effect is performed in the second pre-reading effect pattern (that is, when the on-hold display is displayed in the special mode at the start winning), the on-hold display displayed in the special mode is expected more than the first special mode. Since it is easy to change to the second special mode with a high degree, the sense of expectation can be enhanced, and the game interest can be improved. Moreover, in this embodiment, the pending display displayed in the special mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode until the variable display corresponding to the pending display (hold information) is started. As it is displayed, the sense of expectation can be sustained until the hold display is displayed in a special mode and then changes to a special mode.

  Further, what is characteristic in the pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 32 is that the determination value is set so as not to be determined as the second pre-reading effect pattern when the total number of pending storages is one. In this embodiment, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display displayed in the special mode at the start winning is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode is the target of the advance notice. It is an arbitrary shift timing until variable display is started. However, if the total number of pending storages is 1 (that is, only the pending display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target is displayed), when the shift of the hold display is performed once, the variable display of the notice target is supported. The pending display will be erased. Therefore, when the total number of pending storages is 1, it is not possible to change the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the variable display of the advance target at the shift timing. Therefore, when the total number of pending storages is 1, the determination value is set so as not to be determined as the second pre-reading effect pattern.

  In this embodiment, in order to simplify the description, the timing at which the hold display changes from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode in the first pre-reading effect pattern, and the second In the pre-reading effect pattern, the timing at which the suspension display changes from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode is set as an arbitrary shift timing until the variable display of the notice object is started, Not only this but another timing may be sufficient. For example, the display mode may be changed at an arbitrary timing during a variable display (a period over one variable display or a plurality of variable displays) which is executed before the start of the variable display of the advance target. In this case, for example, even when the total number of pending storages is 1, it is possible to decide on the second pre-reading effect pattern, and the pending display is displayed in a special mode at the start winning prize, corresponding to the pending display (pending information) The special mode may be changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode before the variable display is started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 32, when the display result indicated by the prize determination result specifying command is a hit (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suspiciously big hit" or "small hit") and " For example, even if the display result is a hit, the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit" and "suddenly positive big hit" Alternatively, a pre-reading effect pattern determination table may be provided in which any pre-reading effect pattern is determined at a different ratio in the case of "small hit". Further, for example, similarly to the prefetching effect execution determination table of FIG. 31 (A), the prefetching effect pattern determination table for determining any one of the prefetching effect patterns at a different ratio for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the prize determination result specification command May be provided. By doing so, when the pre-read effect is executed in the first pre-read effect pattern, reach effect with a high degree of expectation is performed in addition to increasing the rate at which the big hit occurs in the variable display of the advance notice object The proportion can also be high.

  Once the preread effect pattern is determined, the effect control CPU 101 determines a change timing (in this example, the number of shifts of the hold display) for changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice target. The determined change timing (number of shifts) is set in a shift number counter for specifying the change timing (number of shifts) (step S67108). In this embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice target is the shift timing of any hold display. Therefore, by determining the change timing (the number of shifts), it is determined at what timing the shift is performed with respect to the hold display corresponding to the change display of the advance notice object at which the display mode is to be changed. For example, when the change timing (the number of shifts) is determined to be 2, the display mode of the hold display is changed at the timing when the second shift is performed on the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice target.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram of a change timing determination table. In step S67108, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the change timing (number of shifts) of the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the advance notice object based on the change timing determination table and the total hold storage number. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 receives the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning combination determination result designation command (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big variation big hit" or 34 (A small hit) (ie, in the case of winning determination result 8 specification ~ winning determination result 13 specification), and the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first pre-reading effect pattern, FIG. 34 (A The first look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the notice target at a rate determined for each total hold memory number in the hit first look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 34A. The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  In the example shown in FIG. 34, the fact that the change timing (number of shifts) is 0 means that the hold display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode at the timing of the start winning. In the case where the hold display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode at the timing of the start winning, for example, a new hold display is realized by displaying the first special mode or the second special mode from the beginning. Alternatively, it may be realized by displaying a new hold display once in a normal mode and immediately changing it to the first special mode or the second special mode.

  Further, in the case of the effect control CPU 101, the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest prize determination result specification command is "off" (that is, in the case of the prize determination result 1 specification to the prize determination result 7 specification) 34) When the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first pre-reading effect pattern, the first pre-reading effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 34 (B) is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the notice target at a rate determined for each total hold memory number in the first look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of departure shown in FIG. 34B. The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 receives the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning time judgment result specification command (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big hit" or "small hit" Shown in FIG. 34C when the pre-read effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second pre-read effect pattern (ie, in the case of winning determination result 8 specification to winning determination result 13 specification). Use a second look-ahead effect change timing determination table for each hit. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the advance notice target at a rate determined for each total hold memory number in the hit second look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 34C. The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  Further, in the case of the effect control CPU 101, the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest prize determination result specification command is "off" (that is, in the case of the prize determination result 1 specification to the prize determination result 7 specification) 34) When the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second pre-reading effect pattern, a second pre-reading effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 34 (D) is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the notice target at a rate determined for each total hold memory number in the second look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of departure shown in FIG. The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  For example, when using the hit first look-ahead effect change timing determination table, if the total number of pending storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 sets the change timing (the number of shifts) to 0 (winning number) at a rate of 50%. The change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30%, and the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 20%. In addition, when using the first look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of departure, if the total number of pending storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 changes the timing (number of shifts) to 0 (prize at 20%). The change timing (number of shifts) is determined as 1 at a ratio of 30%, and the change timing (number of shifts) is determined as 2 at a ratio of 50%.

  Also, for example, when using the hit second pre-reading effect change timing determination table, if the total number of pending storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 changes the timing (number of shifts) by 1 at a rate of 30%. The change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 70%. Further, when using the second look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of departure, if the total number of pending storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 determines the change timing (number of shifts) to be 1 at a ratio of 70%. The change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 30%.

  What is characteristic in the look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that, in the case of the first look-ahead effect pattern, the display result of the change display is hit as compared to the case where the display result of the change display is “off”. The judgment value is set so that the rate at which the number of shifts is determined to be smaller is higher when (for example, “normal big hit”, “probably big hit”, “suddenly big hit” or “small hit”) It is being done. By providing such a feature, when the pre-reading effect is performed in the first pre-reading effect pattern (that is, when the on-hold display is displayed in the special mode without being displayed in the special mode), the on-hold display is performed. If the number of shifts changes from the normal mode to the special mode with a smaller number of shifts, it is possible to increase the rate of occurrence of hitting in the variable display of the advance notice, and further displayed in the special mode at the start winning combination (0 shift). It is possible to increase the rate at which hits occur. Therefore, it is possible to give an interest to the timing at which the hold display changes, and it is possible to enhance the game interest.

  What is characteristic in the look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that, in the case of the second look-ahead effect pattern, the display result of the change display is a hit as compared to the case where the display result of the change display is “off”. The judgment value is set so that the rate at which the number of times of shift changes is determined is higher when (for example, “normal big hit”, “probably big hit”, “suddenly big hit” or “small hit”) It is being done. By providing such a feature, when the pre-reading effect is performed in the second pre-reading effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the start winning combination and then changed to the special mode), The change to the special mode in which the special mode hold display changes to the special mode with a larger number of shifts (that is, after many shifts have been made) can increase the rate at which a hit occurs in the advance display of the variable display. That is, the longer the period from the display of the pending display in the special mode to the change to the special mode (that is, the later the timing of the change is), the higher the rate of occurrence of hits in the variable display for the advance notice can be made. . Therefore, the hold display can be changed at a plurality of timings, and attention can be paid to the timing at which the hold display displayed in the special mode changes, which can enhance the fun of the game.

  In this embodiment, in order to simplify the description, the timing at which the display mode of the suspension display is changed is an arbitrary shift timing until the variable display of the advance notice object is started. In the case where the display mode can be changed at any timing before the start of display, for example, a plurality of types of change timing patterns that can specify the timing to be changed (such as a specific shift timing or a specific change display) May be provided, and one of them may be selected in accordance with the result of the winning determination.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 34, the smaller the number of shifts (that is, the earlier the change timing is) in the case of the first prefetch effect pattern, the more advantageous in the case of the second prefetch effect pattern. Is set to be more advantageous (that is, the later the timing of change is), but for the sake of clarity to the player, for example, the one with a large number of shifts even in the case of the first look-ahead effect pattern (ie change) The later timing may be set to be advantageous). Also, for example, in the case of the second pre-reading effect pattern, it may be set to be advantageous if the number of shifts is smaller (that is, as the timing of change is earlier).

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 34, when the display result indicated by the prize determination result specification command is a hit (for example, "normal big hit", "probably variable big hit", "suddenly odd variable big hit" or "small hit") and " For example, even if the display result is a hit, the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit" and "suddenly positive big hit" Alternatively, a change timing determination table may be provided in which one of the change timings (the number of shifts) is determined at different rates in the "small hit" case. Further, for example, similarly to the prefetch presentation effect execution determination table of FIG. 31 (A), one of the change timings (the number of shifts) is determined at a different ratio for each variation pattern indicated by the prize determination result specification command. A change timing determination table may be provided. By doing so, according to the change timing of the reserve display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the notice target, the rate at which the big hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the notice target is made different, and the rate at which reach effect with high expectation is performed Can also be different.

  In this embodiment, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, a new hold display is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning, but a hold display is displayed in the normal mode at the timing of the start win, The timing may be changed from the normal mode to the special mode, and may be changed from the special mode to the special mode at any later timing.

  When the change timing (the number of shifts) is determined, the effect control CPU 101 performs the change display of the hold display when the pre-read effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second pre-read effect pattern (Y in step S67109) The effect mode of the suggested effect is determined (step S67110). In this embodiment, it is possible to execute suggestion effects that suggest that the display mode of the hold display changes. Further, the suggestive effect is performed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. In step S67110, the effect aspect of the suggestion effect performed at the change timing of the hold display is determined to be either the first effect aspect or the second effect aspect.

  In this embodiment, the hold display changes to the first special mode or the second special mode at different rates according to the presentation mode of the suggestion effect. Specifically, when the suggested effect is executed in the first effect mode, the rate at which the pending display changes to the first special mode is high, and when the suggested effect is executed in the second effect mode, the pending operation is suspended. The rate at which the display changes to the second special mode is high. Therefore, it is suggested that the display mode of the suspension display changes by the execution of the suggestion effect, and it is easy to change to any special mode depending on which production mode the suggestion effect is executed. It is suggested. Although details will be described later, the suggestion effect is also performed at shift timings other than the change timing of the hold display. Therefore, in order to distinguish them, the suggested effect performed at the change timing of the pending display is also referred to as a suggested effect (success pattern), and the suggested effect performed at the shift timing other than the changed timing of the pending display is suggested (passed Also known as a pattern. In this embodiment, any of the suggestive effect (success pattern) and the suggestive effect (pass pattern) is executed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. Therefore, the rate at which the display mode of the hold display changes may be different depending on the effect mode of the suggested effect. For example, when the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode (for example, the first effect mode A may be different from the first effect mode and the second effect mode of this embodiment), the pending display changes. The rate of making is low, and the suggested rendering is performed in the second rendering mode (for example, the first rendering mode B of this embodiment may be taken as the first rendering mode B different from the second rendering mode and the first rendering mode A) In this case, the rate at which the pending display changes may be increased. That is, when the suggested effect is executed in the first effect mode (first effect mode A), the proportion of the suggested effect (success pattern) is high, and the suggested effect is the second effect mode (first effect mode B) In the case where it is carried out in the above, the proportion of the suggested effect (passing pattern) may be increased.

  FIG. 35 (a) is an explanatory view showing a suggestion effect mode determination table for normal prefetch effect. In step S67110, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the effect mode of the suggested effect to be performed at the change timing of the hold display, using the suggested effect mode determination table for the normal prefetched effect shown in FIG. 35 (a). Specifically, based on the extracted latest winning time determination result specification command, the effect is determined at a ratio determined for each winning time determination result (displayed result of fluctuation display) in the suggestion effect mode determination table for normal pre-reading effect The mode is determined to be either the first effect mode or the second effect mode. For example, when it is indicated that the display result of the variable display is “off” in the winning determination result specification command (corresponding to the winning determination result 1 specification to the winning determination result 7 specification), for effect control The CPU 101 determines the effect mode to be the first effect mode at a rate of 80%, and determines the effect mode to be the second effect mode at a rate of 20%. In addition, for example, when it is indicated that the display result of the variable display is “normal big hit” or “probable variation big hit” by the winning determination result specification command (in the winning determination result 8 specification to the winning determination result 12 specification) Correspondingly, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode to be the first effect mode at a rate of 20%, and determines the effect mode to be the second effect mode at a rate of 80%. In addition, for example, when it is indicated that the display result of the variable display is "suddenly probability big hit" or "small hit" in the winning determination result specification command (corresponding to the winning determination result 13 specification), The control CPU 101 determines the effect mode to be the first effect mode at a rate of 50%, and determines the effect mode to be the second effect mode at a rate of 50%.

  What is characteristic in the suggestion effect mode determination table for normal pre-reading shown in FIG. 35 (a) is that the display result is "off" (corresponding to the winning determination result 1 specification to the winning determination result 7 specification) In comparison, when the display result is “normal big hit” or “probable variation big hit” (corresponding to the winning determination result 8 specification to the winning determination result 12 specification), the ratio determined as the second effect mode is higher It is set to become. By providing such a feature, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, the rate at which the big hit occurs in the variable display of the advance target is higher than when it is displayed in the first effect mode. can do. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is “normal big hit” or “probable change big hit”, the percentage of the final display mode of the hold display becoming the second special mode is high, so the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode When this happens, the rate at which the display mode of the pending display changes to the second special mode having a higher degree of expectation than the first special mode is high. Therefore, while being able to give variety to suggestion production, it can be made to pay attention to which suggestion production of presentation mode is performed, and it is possible to improve game interest.

  In the example shown in FIG. 35 (a), each display result indicated by the prize determination result specification command (“Attack”, “Normal big hit” or “Probably big hit” or “Suddenly Positive big hit” or “Small hit”) The ratio for determining the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined, but, for example, similar to the look-ahead effect execution determination table of FIG. 31 (A), for each variation pattern indicated by the winning judgment result specification command You may make it set the judgment value (ratio) for determining the production | presentation aspect of production | presentation. By doing so, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, in addition to increasing the rate at which the big hit occurs in the variable display of the advance notice, the rate at which reach effect with a high degree of expectation is performed Can also be high.

  In this embodiment, the suggested effect is always executed at the shift timing when the display mode of the pending display changes, but the suggested effect may not be executed. In this case, since the display mode of the hold display can be suddenly changed without being suggested by the suggestion effect, the sense of surprise can be enhanced.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although two types of presentation modes of a 1st presentation mode and a 2nd presentation mode are provided as a production mode of suggestion production, it is not restricted to this but three or more types of presentation modes are provided. The degree of expectation may be different (the ratio of selection according to the display result may be different).

  When the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined, the effect control CPU 101 sets a pre-read effect restriction flag indicating that the execution of the pre-reading effect is restricted (step S67111).

  When the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, the pre-reading effect is controlled so as not to be repeatedly performed by the process of step S67101. That is, in this embodiment, when any pending display is displayed in a special mode, control is performed so as not to newly execute pre-reading effect. Therefore, the display of a plurality of pending displays in a special manner is limited. Therefore, by displaying a plurality of hold displays in a special mode, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to which hold display should be noted.

  In this embodiment, when any pending display is displayed in a special mode, it is controlled not to execute pre-reading effect repeatedly, but it is not limited to this, pre-reading effect is overlappingly executed It may be permitted at a fixed rate or completely permitted. That is, the process of step S67111 may be partially or completely omitted, so that a plurality of pending displays may be displayed in a special mode or completely. In addition, for example, even when any one of the suspension displays is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode as well as in the special mode, control may be performed so as not to repeatedly perform the pre-reading effect. For example, when executing the process of step S67114 or when performing the process of step S67115, or when it is determined that it is the timing to change the hold display from the normal mode to the special mode in the effect symbol variation start process described later , And step S1803, etc.) by setting the prefetch effect restriction flag. Also, in this case, the pre-reading effect restriction flag may be reset when the pending display displayed in the special mode is deleted (that is, while the pending display is displayed in the special mode, the pre-reading effect) Execution is limited). In this way, when any hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode, it is restricted that the other hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode by the new pre-reading effect. Therefore, the player can easily understand which hold display to watch.

  In addition, for example, when any one of the hold displays is displayed in the special mode, the first special mode, or the second special mode, a new pre-reading effect may be easily performed. That is, the pre-reading effect may be superimposed and may be easily performed. In addition, for example, in the case of a specific gaming state (for example, a probability change state or a time saving state), the pre-reading effect may be made to be performed repeatedly. For example, in a configuration that allows repeated execution of pre-reading effects at a constant rate, in the case of a specific gaming state, this can be realized by increasing the allowed rate.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the total suspension storage number display unit 18c to display a new suspension display in a special mode (step S67112). In step S67112, the CPU for effect control 101 controls to display a new hold display in a special mode, and information indicating the final display mode determined in step S67106 and an effect of the suggested effect determined in step S67110. Information indicating an aspect is stored in a storage area formed in the RAM. By storing these pieces of information, it is possible to specify which final display mode and the effect mode of the suggested effect are determined in the effect pattern variation start process described later.

  Further, if the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67107 is not the second pre-reading effect pattern (N in step S67109), that is, if the first pre-reading effect pattern is determined, the effect control CPU 101 performs the process in step S67108. It is confirmed whether the determined change timing is the start winning combination (step S67113). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the shift number counter is 0 or not. Then, if the change timing is the start winning combination (Y in step S67113), the effect control CPU 101 determines the new hold display in the total hold storage number display unit 18c at the final display mode determined in step S67106 (first special It is controlled to be displayed in the aspect or the second special aspect) (step S67114).

  Further, if the change timing is not winning in step S67113 (N in step S67113), the CPU for effect control 101 determines the effect mode of the suggested effect to be performed at the change timing of the hold display, as in step S67110 above Step S67115). Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the total suspension storage number display unit 18c to display a new suspension display in the normal mode (step S67116). In step S67116, as in step S67112, the effect control CPU 101 controls to display a new hold display, and the information indicating the final display mode determined in step S67106 and the information determined in step S67115. Information indicating an effect mode of the suggestive effect is stored in a storage area formed in the RAM. By storing these pieces of information, it is possible to specify which final display mode and the effect mode of the suggested effect are determined in the effect pattern variation start process described later.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when it is determined to execute the normal pre-reading effect in the pre-reading effect determination process when receiving the winning determination determination result designation command, the new hold display is the normal mode, the special mode A process of displaying in any of the aspect, the first special aspect or the second special aspect is performed.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing symbol pre-reading effect setting processing. In the symbol pre-reading effect, the effect control CPU 101 is, in the final symbol indication mode (symbol first aspect or symbol second aspect), a hold indication corresponding to the variable indication (pending information) to be notified in advance. Are determined (step S67206). In this embodiment, a symbol target aspect, a symbol first aspect and a symbol second aspect are provided in addition to the normal aspect as a display aspect of the suspension display in the symbol pre-reading effect.

  In this embodiment, the pending display of the symbol target aspect, the pending display of the first symbol aspect, and the pending indication of the second symbol aspect are respectively left as shown in FIGS. 46 (e) (f) (g). Corresponds to the left display information corresponding to the left symbol displayed in the symbol display area 9L, the middle display information corresponding to the middle symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 9C, and the right symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 9R It is configured by the right display information. In this example, the left display information and the right display information are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction of the screen, and the middle display information is arranged above the middle position of these. Since the arrangement of each display information constituting such a suspension display and the arrangement of the actual rendering symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) are consistent, the player can display the suspension display. It is possible to easily grasp which one of the plurality of symbol display areas each display information constituting the corresponds to.

  In this embodiment, as for the pending display of the symbol target form, as shown in FIG. 46 (e), the form of the left display information is "?", The form of the middle display information is "?" It is indicated by the combination that became? Although the pending display of the symbol target aspect does not indicate any of the effect symbols displayed in any of the left symbol display area 9L, the middle symbol display area 9C, and the right symbol display area 9R, the symbol first aspect or symbol first described later It is suggested that there is a possibility of changing into two aspects.

  Moreover, as for the reservation display of the symbol 1st aspect, as shown in FIG. 46 (f), the left display information and the right display information are common symbol forms ("7" in this example), and the form of the middle display information is The effect symbols (that is, reach symbols) displayed in the left symbol display area 9L and the right symbol display area 9R at the timing when the reach state in the variable display corresponding to the pending display is realized, as indicated by the combination “?” Suggesting As described above, the symbol first aspect is an aspect that suggests the reach symbol at the timing of the reach state establishment during the variable display corresponding to the pending display.

  Furthermore, as for the reservation display of the symbol 2nd mode, as shown in FIG. 46 (g), the left display information and the right display information are common symbol forms ("7" in this example), and the form of the middle display information is It is indicated by a combination that becomes a pseudo run symbol ("NEXT" in this example), and is displayed in the left symbol display area 9L and the right symbol display area 9R at the timing when the reach state in the variable display corresponding to the hold display is established. Effect symbols (that is, reach symbols), and the effect symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 9L and the right symbol display area 9R at the timing of the temporary stop during the fluctuation display corresponding to the pending display and the middle It is intended to suggest a rendering symbol (i.e., a pseudo continuous symbol) displayed in the rendering symbol display area 9C. In this manner, the second symbol aspect is an aspect that suggests the reach symbol at the timing of reaching the reach state establishment during the variable display corresponding to the pending display, and the temporary stop timing at the temporary stop timing during the variable display corresponding to the pending display. It is also an aspect that suggests a stop symbol.

  However, the pending display displayed in the symbol target mode is changed from the symbol target mode to the first symbol pattern or the second symbol pattern and displayed until the variable display based on the pending information corresponding to the pending display is started. Be done. Therefore, in step S67206, the final display mode is determined to be either the first pattern design or the second pattern design. Hereinafter, the symbol first aspect and the symbol second aspect may be collectively referred to as a symbol notice aspect.

  In this embodiment, when the rendering symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped), first, the left symbol is stopped (provisionally stopped) in left symbol display area 9L, and then in right symbol display area 9R. The right symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped), and finally, the middle symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the middle symbol display area 9C. Then, as described above, the pseudo run symbol is temporarily stopped after the reach state is established, whereby the combination of the temporary stop symbols is completed and re-variation is performed. Therefore, the combination of the production symbols corresponding to the second symbol aspect is completed at the timing after the combination of the production symbols corresponding to the first symbol aspect is completed. In addition, the stop display order (temporary stop order) of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is not limited to such a form, for example, the right symbol first, then the left symbol, and the middle symbol stop display The left symbol and the right symbol may be displayed at the same time (temporarily stopped) at the same time, and then the middle symbol may be displayed (provisionally stopped) at the same time. The middle symbol and the right symbol may be simultaneously stopped (temporarily stopped).

  FIG. 31 (C) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table for symbol pre-reading effect. In step S67206, the CPU for effect control 101 determines which display mode is to be finally displayed (final display mode) using the final display mode determination table for symbol pre-reading effect shown in FIG. 31C. Specifically, based on the latest winning combination determination result specification command extracted, in the final display mode determination table for the symbol prefetching effect, at a ratio determined for each variation pattern designated by the combination determination result specification command, Determine the final display mode.

  For example, when it is indicated that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is "non reach" by the winning judgment result specification command (corresponding to the winning judgment result 1 specification or the winning judgment result 2 specification), effect control The CPU 101 determines the final display mode as the first pattern pattern at a rate of 95%. In addition, for example, when it is indicated that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is “pseudo consecutive absence reach” by the winning judgment result specification command (in the winning judgment result 3 specification, the winning judgment result 5 specification, the winning judgment The CPU for effect control 101 determines the final display mode to be the first pattern pattern at a rate of 80% for the result 8 specification or the winning determination result 10 specification). In addition, for example, when it is indicated that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is “pseudo continuous presence reach” by the judgment result specification command at the time of winning (designation result of the judgment at winning 4 specification, the result of the judgment at winning 6 specification, judgment at winning) Corresponding to the result 7 specification, the winning determination result 9 specification, the winning determination result 11 specification, or the winning determination result 12 specification), the CPU 101 for effect control controls the final display mode at the ratio of 80%. Decide on.

  A characteristic feature of the final display mode determination table for the symbol pre-reading effect shown in FIG. 31 (C) is that the variation pattern is “pseudo connected no reach”. If the variation pattern is “pseudo-series presence reach” (compared to winning determination result 8 specification or winning determination result 10 specification) (winning determination result 4 specification, winning determination result 6 specification, winning) Judgment value so that the ratio determined in the second pattern of pattern is higher when the time judgment result 7 specification, the winning time judgment result 9 specification, the winning time judgment result 11 specification, or the winning time judgment result 12 specification) Is set. By having such a feature, when the pending display is displayed in the second pattern, the ratio at which the pseudo-series effect occurs in the variable display of the advance notice object, as compared to the time when it is displayed in the first pattern Can be raised. As described above, the percentage of display results becoming a big hit is set higher for the variation pattern with the pseudo-series effect than the variation pattern without the pseudo-series effect, so the second pattern is the symbol second pattern It is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the displayed in the form is a big hit, and to focus attention on which display form the hold display is displayed when the pre-reading effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31 (C), the display mode of the suspension display is the first pattern design or the second pattern design even when the winning determination result is the non-reach fluctuation pattern. Although the example which may be changed to is explained, it is not restricted to such a form, and when the result at the time of a prize determination is a change pattern of non-reach, the display mode of a suspension display is a symbol first mode or a symbol The second mode may not be changed. That is, only when the determination result at the time of winning is the fluctuation pattern of reach, the symbol pre-reading effect may be executed to change the display mode of the suspension display to the first pattern pattern or the second pattern pattern. Also, in this embodiment, an example is described in which the display mode of the suspension display may be changed to the second pattern even when the result of the winning determination is a fluctuation pattern with no pseudo link, but this is an example. Not limited to such a form, the display mode of the suspension display may not be changed to the second pattern when the determination result at the time of winning is a fluctuation pattern with no pseudo link. That is, the display mode of the suspension display may be changed to the second pattern of symbols only when the result of the determination of winning is a fluctuation pattern of presence of pseudo connection.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although two types of display modes of a symbol first mode and a symbol second mode are provided as a final display mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of display modes are provided, respectively. The degree of expectation may be different (the ratio selected depending on the variation pattern may be different).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 determines an effect pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a pre-read effect pattern) of pre-reading effect in the normal pre-reading effect (step S67207).

  In this embodiment, as described above, the first pre-reading effect pattern and the second pre-reading effect pattern are provided as the pre-reading effect pattern. In the first prefetching effect pattern in the symbol prefetching effect, the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display (pending information) of the advance notice object is displayed in the symbol first mode or the symbol second mode without being displayed once in the symbol target mode Ru. In addition, with regard to the first look-ahead effect pattern in the symbol look-ahead effect, the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display (hold information) of the notice object at the timing of the start winning is displayed in the first pattern pattern or the second pattern pattern The hold display corresponding to the change display (hold information) of the advance notice object changes from the normal mode to the first symbol pattern or the second pattern symbol at an arbitrary shift timing until the target variable display (hold information) is started. Including what is displayed. On the other hand, in the second look-ahead effect pattern in the symbol look-ahead effect, the pending display corresponding to the change display of the notice object is displayed in the symbol target mode at the timing of the start winning, and any change until the change object of the notice object is started At the shift timing, the symbol target aspect is changed and displayed from the symbol target aspect to the symbol first aspect or the symbol second aspect.

  The method of determining the prefetching effect pattern in the symbol prefetching effect is the same as the method of determining the prefetching effect pattern in the normal prefetch effect, and is determined based on the prefetching effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Here, the pre-reading effect pattern determination table in the pre-reading effect usually displays the holding display in the normal mode at the time of winning, and thereafter determines the percentage of the first pre-reading effect pattern to be changed to the special mode and the holding display at the time of winning It is displayed in the form, and the determination ratio of the second look-ahead effect pattern to be changed to the special form after that is determined according to the display result (hit or miss) specified by winning judgment result specification command and the total number of pending storages It was On the other hand, the pre-reading effect pattern determination table in the symbol pre-reading effect displays the suspension display in the normal mode at the time of winning, and then determines the ratio of the first pre-reading effect pattern to be changed to the symbol preview mode and the time of winning The display result is displayed in the symbol target mode, and then the determination ratio of the second pre-reading effect pattern to be changed to the symbol advance notice mode, the display result (hit or miss) specified by the command at the time of winning It is determined according to the number.

  Therefore, the explanation regarding the method of determining the pre-read effect pattern in the pre-reading effect usually, "special aspect" to "symbol target aspect", "first special aspect" to "symbol first aspect", "second special aspect" In the "pattern second mode", the "special mode" used as a generic term for the first special mode and the second special mode is replaced with the "pattern advance mode" and applied to the method of determining the pre-reading effect pattern in the symbol pre-reading effect can do.

  When the pre-reading effect pattern is determined, the effect control CPU 101 causes the symbol designating command (for example, the total number of pending storage numbers is stored in the storage area corresponding to the latest winning time determination result designating command) in the start winning time command storage area. In the case of 3, the reach symbol suggested to the player in the symbol pre-reading effect is determined with reference to the symbol designation command of the storage area 3 (S67207a). The reach symbol determined here will be reflected in the aspect of the left display information and the right display information which constitute the pending display of the symbol advance notice aspect (the symbol first aspect and the symbol second aspect). The player who sees the hold display is expected that the reach state will occur in the variable display corresponding to the hold display by the left display information and the right display information being in the form of the common symbol (reach symbol). Furthermore, it is possible to predict the symbol when the reach state is established.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory view showing a reach symbol determination table. When the symbol designation command corresponding to the latest prize determination result designation command designates "off" (design 1 designation), each odd symbol ("1", "3", "5") as a reach symbol "," "7", "9") at a rate of 4%, and each even symbol ("2", "4", "6", "8") at a rate of 20%. Then, when the symbol designation command corresponding to the latest prize determination result designation command designates “normal big hit” (design 2 designation), each odd symbol (“1”, “3”) as a reach symbol , “5”, “9”) at a rate of 6%, and each even symbol (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) at a rate of 18%. However, among odd symbols, only “7” is determined at a rate of 4%. Then, when the symbol designation command corresponding to the latest prize determination result designation command designates “probable variation big hit” (design 3 designation), each odd symbol (“1”, “3”) as a reach symbol , “5”, “9”) at a ratio of 12%, and each even symbol (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) at a ratio of 4%. However, among the odd symbols, only "7" is determined at a rate of 36%.

  As described above, the ratio of becoming a big hit is higher in the case of an odd symbol than in the case where the reach symbol suggested by the symbol pre-reading effect is an even symbol, and the ratio of becoming a definite variation big hit is high. As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the reach symbol suggested by the symbol prefetching effect is an odd symbol, and the interest of the symbol prefetching effect can be improved. Further, in this example, when the reach symbol is 7 among the odd symbols, the probability of becoming a probability variation big hit is set to be particularly high, and the player can only determine whether the reach symbol is an odd symbol or an even symbol. In addition, attention will be paid to whether or not it is "7", and the interest can be further improved.

  In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-series effect, the reach symbol constituting the final stop symbol (derived display result) and the reach symbol constituting the temporary stop symbol are common. And because the middle symbol of the temporary stop symbol is a predetermined pseudo-connected symbol (in this example, the character "NEXT"), to determine the reach symbol is a combination of the temporary stop symbol (left symbol, It is also to determine the middle symbol and the right symbol as "reach symbol", "NEXT" and "reach symbol".

  When the reach symbol is determined, the effect control CPU 101 stores the reach symbol in association with the symbol designation command (and the prize determination result designation command) at the start winning prize command storage area referred to in step S67207a (step S67207b) . In this embodiment, reach symbol storage areas corresponding to the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area are provided, and the total number of pending storages (the value of the counter for the total pending storages for effect) is provided. The reach symbol determined in step S67207a is stored in the reach symbol storage area. Then, when shifting the contents of the start winning command storage area (step S 1811 described later), the reach symbol stored with the corresponding symbol designating command (and the winning determination result designating command) is shifted, and the corresponding symbol designating command When (and the winning determination result specifying command) is deleted, the stored reach symbol is deleted. By doing this, when the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started, it is possible to set the reach symbol to the reach symbol determined at the time of the start winning (step S1800 d described later).

  When the reach symbol is stored, the CPU for effect control 101 determines and decides the change timing (in this example, the number of shifts of the hold display) for changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice target. The change timing (number of shifts) is set in a shift number counter for specifying the change timing (number of shifts) (step S67208).

  The method of determining the change timing (number of shifts) in the symbol pre-reading effect is the same as the method of determining the change timing in normal pre-reading effect, and is determined based on the pre-reading effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. Here, the hit first look-ahead effect change timing determination table in the normal look-ahead effect and the out-of-time first look-ahead effect change timing determination table determine the change timing from the normal mode to the special mode according to the total number of pending storages. It was a thing. On the other hand, the hit time first look-ahead effect change timing determination table for symbol pre-reading effects and the off-time first look-ahead effect change timing determination table are based on the total number of pending storages changing timing from the normal mode to the symbol notice mode. It is determined.

  In addition, the hit time second look-ahead effect change timing determination table in normal look-ahead effect, and the out-of-time second look-ahead effect change timing determination table determine the change timing from the special mode to the special mode according to the total number of pending storages. Met. On the other hand, the hit time second look-ahead effect change timing determination table in the symbol pre-reading effect and the second look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of break out are the change timing from the symbol target aspect to the symbol advance state It was decided accordingly.

  Therefore, for the description of the method of determining the change timing in the pre-reading effect, the "special aspect" is the "symbol target aspect", the "first special aspect" is the "symbol first aspect", and the "second special aspect" is " In "pattern second mode", replace "special mode" used as a generic term for the first special mode and the second special mode in "pattern advance mode" and apply it to the method of determining the change timing in the symbol pre-reading effect Can. It is assumed that the "prediction effect pattern determined in step S67107" is replaced with the "prediction effect pattern determined in step S67207".

  If the change timing (the number of shifts) is determined, the effect control CPU 101 performs the change display of the hold display when the pre-read effect pattern determined in step S67207 is the second pre-read effect pattern (Y in step S67209) A presentation mode of the suggested presentation is determined (step S67210). In this embodiment, it is possible to execute suggestion effects that suggest that the display mode of the hold display changes. Further, the suggestive effect is performed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. In step S67210, the effect aspect of the suggestion effect performed at the change timing of the hold display is determined to be either the first effect aspect or the second effect aspect.

  In this embodiment, the pending display changes to the first symbol pattern or the second symbol pattern at different rates according to the presentation aspect of the suggested effect. Specifically, in the case where the suggested effect is executed in the first effect mode, the percentage in which the final display mode of the suspension display is the first pattern pattern is high, and the suggested effect is executed in the second effect mode. The rate at which the final display mode of the hold display is the second pattern is high. Therefore, by the suggestion effect being executed, it is suggested that the display mode of the suspension display is changed, and it is easy to change to any of the symbol notice modes according to which effect mode the suggestion effect is executed. Is suggested. Although details will be described later, the suggestion effect is also performed at shift timings other than the change timing of the hold display. Therefore, in order to distinguish them, the suggested effect performed at the change timing of the pending display is also referred to as a suggested effect (success pattern), and the suggested effect performed at the shift timing other than the changed timing of the pending display is suggested (passed Also known as a pattern. In this embodiment, any of the suggestive effect (success pattern) and the suggestive effect (pass pattern) is executed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. Therefore, the rate at which the display mode of the hold display changes may be different depending on the effect mode of the suggested effect. For example, when the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode (for example, the first effect mode A may be different from the first effect mode and the second effect mode of this embodiment), the pending display changes. The rate of making is low, and the suggested rendering is performed in the second rendering mode (for example, the first rendering mode B of this embodiment may be taken as the first rendering mode B different from the second rendering mode and the first rendering mode A) In this case, the rate at which the pending display changes may be increased. That is, when the suggested effect is executed in the first effect mode (first effect mode A), the proportion of the suggested effect (success pattern) is high, and the suggested effect is the second effect mode (first effect mode B) In the case where it is carried out in the above, the proportion of the suggested effect (passing pattern) may be increased.

  FIG. 35 (b) is an explanatory view showing a suggestion effect mode determination table for symbol pre-reading effect. In step S67210, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the effect mode of the suggested effect to be performed at the change timing of the hold display, using the suggested effect mode determination table for symbol pre-read effect shown in FIG. 35 (b). Specifically, based on the extracted latest winning time determination result specification command, in the proportion determined for each winning case determination result (fluctuation pattern of fluctuation display) in the suggested rendering mode determination table for symbol pre-reading effect, the effect The mode is determined to be either the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

  For example, when it is indicated that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is "non reach" by the winning judgment result specification command (corresponding to the winning judgment result 1 specification or the winning judgment result 2 specification), effect control The CPU 101 determines the effect mode to be the first effect mode at a rate of 95%, and determines the effect mode to be the second effect mode at a rate of 5%. In addition, for example, when it is indicated that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is “pseudo consecutive absence reach” by the winning judgment result specification command (in the winning judgment result 3 specification, the winning judgment result 5 specification, the winning judgment The CPU for effect control 101 determines the effect mode to be the first effect mode at a rate of 80%, and the effect mode is a second effect at a rate of 20%. Determine the form. In addition, for example, when it is indicated that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is “pseudo continuous presence reach” by the judgment result specification command at the time of winning (designation result of the judgment at winning 4 specification, the result of the judgment at winning 6 specification, judgment at winning) Corresponding to the result 7 specification, the winning determination result 9 specification, the winning determination result 11 specification, or the winning determination result 12 specification), the effect control CPU 101 sets the effect mode to the second effect mode at a rate of 80% It determines and determines a production | presentation aspect to a 1st presentation aspect by a ratio of 20%.

  What is characteristic in the suggestion effect mode determination table for symbol pre-reading shown in FIG. 35 (b) is that the variation pattern is “pseudo run without reach” (pricing determination result 3 designation, winning determination result 5 designation, When it is indicated that the fluctuation pattern is “pseudo connected presence reach” (compared to the winning determination result 8 specification or the winning determination result 10 specification) (winning determination result 4 specification, winning determination) The ratio of the result 6 specification, the determination result of winning 7 specification, the determination result of winning 9 specification, the specification of winning determination result 11 specification, or the winning determination result 12 specification is higher in the ratio of being determined as the second effect mode It is set to become. By providing such a feature, when the suggested effect is executed in the second effect mode, the ratio at which the pseudo continuous effect occurs in the variable display of the advance target, as compared with the time when the suggested effect is executed in the first effect mode Can be raised. As described above, the variation pattern with the pseudo-sequence effect has a higher percentage of the display result becoming a big hit than the variation pattern without the pseudo-sequence effect, and the variation pattern is “the pseudo sequence without reach The percentage of the final display mode being the second symbol mode is higher in the case of “pseudo connected presence reach” compared to the case of “”, so when the suggested rendering is performed in the second rendering mode, it is suspended. The rate at which the display mode of display changes to the second pattern of patterns having a higher degree of expectation than the first pattern of patterns becomes high. Therefore, while being able to give variety to suggestion production, it can be made to pay attention to which suggestion production of presentation mode is performed, and it is possible to improve game interest.

  In the example shown in FIG. 35 (b), the effect of the suggested effect is given to each fluctuation pattern ("non reach", "simulated ream without reach", or "simulated reed with reach") indicated by the prize determination result specification command. Although a ratio for determining the mode is determined, for example, each display result indicated by the prize determination result specification command (“は”, “normal big hit” or “probably big hit” or “suddenly big change big hit” or “ It is also possible to set the judgment value (ratio) for determining the presentation mode of the suggested effect to “small hit”). By doing so, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, it is possible to increase the rate of occurrence of the big hit in the change display of the advance target.

  In this embodiment, the suggested effect is always executed at the shift timing when the display mode of the pending display changes, but the suggested effect may not be executed. In this case, since the display mode of the hold display can be suddenly changed without being suggested by the suggestion effect, the sense of surprise can be enhanced.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although two types of presentation modes of a 1st presentation mode and a 2nd presentation mode are provided as a production mode of suggestion production, it is not restricted to this but three or more types of presentation modes are provided. The degree of expectation may be different (the ratio of selection according to the display result may be different).

  When the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined, the effect control CPU 101 sets a pre-read effect restriction flag indicating that the execution of the pre-reading effect is restricted (step S67211).

  When the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, the pre-reading effect is controlled so as not to be repeatedly performed by the process of step S67101. That is, in this embodiment, when any pending display is displayed in the symbol target mode, control is performed so as not to newly execute pre-reading effect. Therefore, it is limited that a plurality of pending displays are displayed in the symbol target mode. Therefore, by displaying a plurality of suspension displays in the symbol target mode, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to which suspension display should be focused on.

  In this embodiment, when any pending display is displayed in the symbol target mode, it is controlled so as not to execute pre-reading effect overlappingly, but it is not limited to this, overlapping pre-reading effect is overlapping The execution may be allowed at a fixed rate or may be completely allowed. That is, the processing of step S67211 may be partially or completely omitted, so that a plurality of suspension displays may be displayed in a certain pattern or completely. In addition, for example, even when any pending display is displayed not only in the symbol target mode but also in the first symbol first mode or the second symbol mode, even if it is controlled not to execute the pre-reading effect overlappingly Good. For example, when performing the process of step S67214 or when performing the process of step S67215 or when it is determined that it is the timing to change the pending display from the normal mode to the symbol advance mode in the effect symbol variation start process described later ( For example, this can be realized by setting the prefetch effect restriction flag in step S1803 and the like. Also, in this case, the pre-reading effect restriction flag may be reset when the hold display displayed in the symbol notice mode is deleted (that is, while the hold display is displayed in the symbol notice mode). Execution of pre-reading effect is restricted). In this way, when any hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode, it is restricted that the other hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode by the new pre-reading effect. Therefore, the player can easily understand which hold display to watch.

  Further, for example, when any pending display is displayed in the symbol target mode or the symbol first mode or the symbol second mode, a new pre-reading effect may be easily performed. That is, the pre-reading effect may be superimposed and may be easily performed. In addition, for example, in the case of a specific gaming state (for example, a probability change state or a time saving state), the pre-reading effect may be made to be performed repeatedly. For example, in a configuration that allows repeated execution of pre-reading effects at a constant rate, in the case of a specific gaming state, this can be realized by increasing the allowed rate.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the total hold storage number display unit 18c to display a new hold display in a symbol target mode (step S67212). In addition, in step S67212, the CPU 101 for effect control controls to display a new hold display in the symbol target mode, and indicates the final display mode (symbol first mode or symbol second mode) determined in step S67206. The information and the information indicating the presentation mode of the suggestion effect determined in step S67210 are stored in the storage area formed in the RAM. By storing these pieces of information, it is possible to specify which final display mode and the effect mode of the suggested effect are determined in the effect pattern variation start process described later.

  Further, when the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67207 is not the second pre-reading effect pattern (N in step S67209), that is, when the first pre-reading effect pattern is determined, the effect control CPU 101 performs the process in step S67208. It is checked whether the determined change timing is the start winning combination (step S67213). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the shift number counter is 0 or not. Then, if the change timing is the start winning combination (Y in step S67213), the effect control CPU 101 determines the new hold display in the total hold storage number display unit 18c at the final display mode determined in step S67206 (symbol 1) It is controlled to display in the aspect or the symbol second aspect (step S67214).

  In addition, if the change timing is not winning in step S67213 (N in step S67213), the CPU for effect control 101 determines the effect mode of the suggested effect to be performed at the change timing of the hold display as in step S67210 described above ( Step S67215). Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the total hold storage number display unit 18c to display a new hold display in the normal mode (step S67216). In step S67216, as in step S67212, the effect control CPU 101 controls to display a new hold display, and also determines in step S67215 the information indicating the final display mode determined in step S67206. Information indicating an effect mode of the suggestive effect is stored in a storage area formed in the RAM. By storing these pieces of information, it is possible to specify which final display mode and the effect mode of the suggested effect are determined in the effect pattern variation start process described later.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when it is determined to execute the symbol pre-reading effect in the pre-reading effect determination processing when the winning-time determination result specification command is received, the new hold display is the normal mode, the symbol A process of displaying in the target aspect, the first pattern aspect or the second aspect pattern is performed.

  In this embodiment, the variable display is executed in the winning order of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is given priority. If it is configured to be executed, (1) it is configured to perform pre-reading effect only for the variable display of the first special symbol, and (2) only the variable display of the second special symbol There are three possible configurations: one is to perform prefetching effects for the target, and (3) the configuration is to perform prefetching effects for the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. .

  When the configuration of the above (1) is added to the configuration in which priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, the shift number counter according to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first pending storage number Maximum 4 is set to. However, even if the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the suspension display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed with the configuration of the above (1), the first start winning opening 14 will receive the first prize. (2) Since the variation display of the special symbol is interrupted and executed (in priority order, not in the winning order), for example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, the effect symbol described later, even at the shift timing It is desirable to configure so as not to subtract the value of the shift number counter in step S1802b of the fluctuation start process. Moreover, also when the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the suspension display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed in the configuration of the above (3), similarly, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed It is desirable to configure so as not to subtract the value of the shift number counter in step S1802b of the effect symbol variation start process described later.

  In addition, when the configuration of the above (2) is added to the configuration in which priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, the shift is made according to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) A maximum of 4 is set in the number counter. In this case, unlike the configuration of the above (1), the value of the shift number counter is subtracted when the shift timing comes, regardless of whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is subjected to variable display. Moreover, also in the configuration of the above (3), even when the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the suspension display corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, similarly, any of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Even when the variable display is performed, the value of the shift number counter is subtracted at the shift timing.

  In addition, when it is constituted so that priority is given to change display of the 2nd special symbol, in high base, it is constituted so that pre-reading effect is not performed for change display of the 1st special symbol. May be In addition, when it is constituted in order to execute with fluctuation indication of 2nd special symbol priority, it is constituted so as not to do pre-reading effect based on the winning a prize to 1st starting winning a prize mouth 13 in the big hit game It is also good. Such a configuration, for example, during the high base medium or during a big hit game, even if a prize for the first start winning opening 13 occurs in the gaming control microcomputer 560, the effect processing in step S1217 is executed This can be realized by performing control so as not to execute even if it is decided to execute the pre-reading effect, if it is determined not to execute, or the winning combination determination result specification command received in the effect control microcomputer 560 is determined to be performed. . In addition, when adding the configuration of the above (3) to the configuration in which priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, during high base or during a big hit game, prefetching based on the winning of the first start winning opening 13 Although the effect is not performed, the pre-reading effect based on the winning of the second start winning opening 14 may be performed. Such a configuration, for example, during the high base medium or during a big hit game, even if a prize for the first start winning opening 13 occurs in the gaming control microcomputer 560, the effect processing in step S1217 is executed If it is decided not to execute, or if it is decided to cancel the command at the time of winning result judgment command based on the winning to the first start winning opening 13 received in the microcomputer 560 for effect control, it is not executed It can be realized by controlling as follows.

  In the case where the configuration of the above (1) is added to the configuration in which priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, there is a pending storage based on the winning on the second start winning opening 14 When a winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs, it is possible not to execute the pre-reading effect for the pending storage based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in the case of adding the configuration of the above (1) to the configuration in which priority is given to the variable display of the second special symbol, the pre-reading effect for the pending storage based on the winning on the first start winning opening 13 In the state where the execution is determined, when a winning on the second start winning opening 14 occurs, the execution of the pre-reading effect which has already been determined may be canceled.

  In this embodiment, the variable display is executed in the winning order in any one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the pre-reading effect is performed only for the variable display of the first special symbol (above (( 1)) Alternatively, a configuration (the above-mentioned (2)) may be added to perform pre-reading effect only for the variable display of the second special symbol. Also, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed in the winning order in any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but for example, during the high base middle or during a big hit game, to the first start winning opening 13 Pre-reading effects may not be performed based on the winnings of.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S806 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control regarding variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second Control relating to variable display of the rendering symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol is also executed in one rendering control process.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a fluctuation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (step S801).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (step S802).

  Process during production symbol fluctuation (step S802): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (variation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803).

  Effect design fluctuation stop processing (step S803): Based on the fact that the effect control command (design confirmation specified command) which instructs stop of all the symbols is received, the fluctuation of the effect design is stopped and the display result (stop design) is derived and displayed Take control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the big hit game (step S805).

  During the big hit game processing (step S805): Control during the big hit game is performed. For example, when a special winning opening open designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 9 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect processing (step S806).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S806): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a change pattern command from the change pattern command storage area (step S1800). Next, the effect control CPU 101 associates the symbol designation command (and the prize determination result designation command) in storage area 1 (storage area 1 before the shift of S 1811 described later is executed) in the start winning prize command storage area. It is checked whether or not the reach symbol is stored (step S1800a).

  As described above, when it is determined that the symbol pre-reading effect is executed in the determination at the start winning combination, the reach symbol to be notified is determined in step S67207a, and the reach symbol determined here is The command is stored in association with the symbol designation command (and the prize determination result designation command) in the storage area corresponding to the total number of pending storages in the start winning command storage area, and thereafter the symbol designation command (and prize) is determined in step S1811 described later. It is designed to be shifted together with the hour judgment result specification command). Therefore, the fact that the reach symbol associated with the symbol designation command of the storage area 1 (and the prize determination result designation command) is stored in step S1800a means that the variable display started becomes the target of the symbol pre-reading effect It shows that it is a variable display.

  When the reach symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command of the storage area 1 (and the prize determination result designation command) is not stored in step S1800a (N in step S1800a), that is, the variation display to be started is of symbol prefetching effect If it does not become the target (if the first hold display before the shift is executed in step S 1811 is not the symbol advance notice mode), the process proceeds to step S 1800 b.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the display result of the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern command read in step S1800 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command) The stop symbol) is determined (step S1800b). That is, by the effect control CPU 101 executing the process of step S1800b, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the design symbol according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means Display result determining means for determining the symbol) is realized. Note that the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory view showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 40, when the received display result designation command normally indicates a big hit (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the CPU 101 for effect control is a stop symbol. 3 The combination of the production design which is even design (stop design which usually evokes occurrence of big hit) is decided even design. Then, if the even symbol is determined as the reach symbol and the received fluctuation pattern command designates the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the pseudo continuous rendition, the even reciprocation (reach symbol) and the pseudo relic determined in advance A combination of temporary stop symbols consisting of symbols (in this example, characters of "NEXT") is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates the probability variation big hit (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the 3 symbols are odd symbols (probable variation) Determine the combination of the production design that is aligned with the stop design) which reminds of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, if the odd symbol is determined as the reach symbol, and the received variation pattern command designates the variation pattern with the pseudo serial effect, the odd serial symbol (reach symbol) and the pseudo serial determined in advance. A combination of temporary stop symbols consisting of symbols (in this example, characters of "NEXT") is determined.

  Then, in the case of a disconnection (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when it is accompanied by the reach effect, the combination of the effect pattern with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. Then, if the symbol (a symbol common to the left and right) is determined as a reach symbol, and the received variation pattern command designates a variation pattern with a pseudo-sequence effect, the symbol (reach symbol) is determined in advance. A combination of temporary stop symbols consisting of a pseudo continuous symbol (in this example, the character "NEXT") is determined. In the case where the received display result designation command suddenly indicates a definite big hit or a small hit (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 Determines the combination of the rendering symbols such as "135" as the stopping symbol. Further, the combination of three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

  For example, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data representing a combination of effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other, the stop symbol of the effect symbol decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

  In addition, also about the production design, the stop design which evokes a big hit is called the big hit design. Also, a stop pattern that evokes a big hit is called a big hit symbol, and a stop pattern that usually brings up a big hit is called a big hit symbol. And, the stop design which reminds of the release is called the release design.

  When the reach symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command of the storage area 1 (and the prize determination result designation command) is stored in step S1800a (Y in step S1800a), that is, the variation display to be started is of symbol prefetching effect If it is the target (if the first hold display before the shift of step S 1811 is executed is the symbol advance notice mode), the process proceeds to step S 1800 c.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the reach pattern associated with the symbol designation command of the storage area 1 (and the prize determination result designation command), the variation pattern command read in step S1800, and the display result designation command storage area It is checked whether or not the received data (that is, the received display result designation command) is consistent (S1800c).

  Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined to execute the symbol pre-reading effect at the start winning combination, the reach symbol is determined based on the symbol specifying command (step S67207a). And, as shown in FIG. 31 (C), even if the prize determination result is a non-reach variation pattern, it is decided to change the display mode of the suspension display to the first pattern pattern or the second pattern pattern. In this case, the reach symbol to be notified is determined (step S67207a). In addition, the gaming state may change in a period from the start winning combination to the variable display based on the starting winning combination. For example, when the start winning combination is a definite change state, but when the variable display based on the start winning combination is started, it is in the non definite change state (normal gaming state and time saving state) or when the start winning combination is not definite state Although the normal gaming state and the time saving state are), when the variable display based on the start winning is started, it may be in the positive changing state. In addition, when the start winning combination was a time saving state, but when the variable display based on the starting winning combination is started, it is in the normal gaming state or when the starting winning combination is the normal gaming state, it is based on the starting winning combination When the variable display is started, it may be in the short state. Furthermore, although the gaming state has not changed in the period from the start winning combination to the variable display based on the starting winning combination, the variation pattern selected at the starting winning combination and the starting combination due to the change in the total number of pending storages In some cases, the actual fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation display corresponding to the winning is different.

  As described above, even if the reach symbol for advance notice is determined despite the fluctuation pattern not involving reach in the determination at the start winning, or when the gaming state or the like changes, provisionally in step S1800 d described later. When the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a predetermined reach symbol (reach symbol determined in step S67207a), the variation pattern command read in step S1800 indicates a variation pattern without a reach. In the actual fluctuation, the reach symbol common to the left symbol display area 9L and the right symbol display area 9R is stopped, or the odd reach symbol is stopped in the actual fluctuation although the display result designation command usually indicates a big hit Or even though the display result specification command indicates a definite Reach symbols of which may inconsistencies such or stop occurs.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in the case where a mismatch occurs between the reach symbol determined at the start winning combination and the variation pattern command or the display result designation command in step S1800c (N in step S1800c), Instead of being a stop symbol according to the reach symbol, the process proceeds to step S1800b and is made to be a stop symbol according to the fluctuation pattern command or the display result designation command. Specifically, in step S1800c, (i) when the variation pattern command read in step S1800 indicates a non-reach variation pattern, it is determined that there is no match, and the process proceeds to step S1800b. In addition, (ii) when the reach symbol is an odd symbol (one of "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9") and the display result designation command usually indicates a big hit, matching It determines with not carrying out and it transfers to step S1800 b. In addition, (iii) the reach symbol is an even symbol (one of "2", "4", "6", and "8"), and the display result designation command is not consistent if it indicates a probability variation jackpot It determines with it and transfers to step S1800b.

  In step S1800c, when the reach symbol determined at the start winning combination is consistent with the fluctuation pattern command or the display result designation command (Y in step S1800c), that is, any of the above (i) to (iii) When it does not correspond either, it shifts to step S800d, decides the indicatory result (stop design) of the production design which responds to the reach design. Specifically, when the display result designation command indicates a release, the left symbol and the right symbol are determined to be the stored reach symbol, and the middle symbol is determined to be the effect symbol other than the reach symbol. . Then, when the received variation pattern command further designates a variation pattern accompanied by a pseudo-series effect, the symbol (reach pattern) and a pseudo-series symbol (a character of “NEXT” in this example) predetermined in advance. And determine the combination of temporary stop symbols.

  In addition, when the display result specification command usually indicates a big hit, it is determined that the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are all stored as even reach symbols that are stored. Then, when the received variation pattern command further designates a variation pattern with a pseudo-series effect, the even symbol (reach pattern) and the pseudo-series symbol ("NEXT" in this example) predetermined in advance And a combination of temporary stop symbols consisting of In addition, when the display result specification command indicates a probability variation big hit, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are determined to be combinations of odd-numbered reach symbols storing all of them. Then, when the received variation pattern command further designates a variation pattern with a pseudo-series effect, the odd-numbered symbol (reach symbol) and the pseudo-series symbol ("NEXT" in this example) predetermined in advance And a combination of temporary stop symbols consisting of That is, by the effect control CPU 101 executing the process of step S1800d, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect pattern according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means Display result determining means for determining the symbol) is realized. Note that the effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  After determining the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S1800b or step S1800d, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the shift number counter for specifying the change timing (number of shifts) is greater than 0 (step S1801). That the value of the shift number counter is greater than 0 means that it is decided to execute the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode for any of the hold displays displayed on the total hold memory display unit 18c. Is shown. Therefore, in step S1801, it is confirmed whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect (change the display mode of the hold display) is determined.

  When the value of the shift number counter is not larger than 0 (N in step S1801), that is, the value of the shift number counter is 0 and it is determined that the pre-reading effect is performed (the display mode of the hold display is changed) If not, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S1806.

  On the other hand, if the value of the shift number counter is greater than 0 (Y in step S1801), that is, if it is determined to execute the pre-reading effect (change the display mode of the hold display), for effect control The CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the effect sum total storage number counter (step S1802a). Further, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the shift number counter (step S1802b). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the value of the shift number counter is 1 or not (step S1802c). The fact that the value of the shift number counter becomes 1 means that the display mode of the hold display, which is the target of the pre-reading effect, is changed to the final display mode by the next change of the change.

  In step S1802c, when the value of the shift number counter is not 1, that is, when the display mode of the suspension display as the target of the pre-reading effect is not changed to the final display mode by the next change of the change, the CPU 101 for effect control Checks whether the value of the shift number counter is 0 or not (step S1803). As a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the shift number counter in step S1802b, the value of the shift number counter becomes 0 means that one of the display modes of the hold display displayed on the total hold memory display unit 18c. It indicates that it is time to execute the pre-reading effect to be changed. Therefore, in step S1803, it is confirmed whether or not it is the change timing of the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the hold display.

  In step S1803, when the value of the shift number counter is not 0, that is, when it is not the change timing of the pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1806. On the other hand, if the value of the shift number counter is 0, that is, if it is the change timing of the pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1808.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 determines an effect mode of the suggested effect which suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes (step S1806). Here, the process of step S1806 is not performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold display changes due to the pre-reading effect. Therefore, in step S1806, although it suggests that the display mode of the suspension display changes, as a result, the effect mode of the suggestion effect to be executed when the display mode does not change is determined. In addition, in order to distinguish from the suggestion effect (success pattern) performed when the display mode of the hold display changes, the suggestion effect performed when the display mode does not change is also referred to as a suggestive effect (pass pattern).

  In step S1806, when the pre-reading effect restriction flag is not set, that is, when any holding display is not displayed in the special mode or the symbol target mode in the summing hold display unit 18c, the effect control CPU 101 performs the process shown in FIG. It is determined that the suggestion effect (pass pattern) is not performed or is performed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode according to the ratio of the suggestion effect (pass pattern) determination table shown in 2.). Further, when the pre-read effect restriction flag is set, that is, when any hold display is displayed in the special mode or the symbol target mode, the effect control CPU 101 sets FIG. 38 (B). It is determined that the suggestion effect (pass pattern) is not performed or is performed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode at the ratio of the suggestion effect (pass pattern) determination table shown in. In addition, although the determination value corresponding to the determination item (“no effect”, “first effect mode” or “second effect mode”) is assigned to the suggested effect (pass pattern) determination table, FIG. In the example shown to A) and (B), in order to simplify description, the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the effect mode of the suggested effect (passing pattern), and the determination items (“no effect”, “No effect”, or the (1) It is decided on the "presentation mode" or the "second presentation mode").

  For example, when the pre-read effect restriction flag is not set, that is, when no hold display is displayed in the special mode or the symbol target mode in the total hold display unit 18c, the suggested effect (pass pattern) is performed at a rate of 60%. It is determined not to execute, it is determined to execute the suggested effect in the first effect mode at a rate of 30%, and it is determined to execute the suggested effect in the second effect mode at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the pre-read effect restriction flag is set, that is, when any hold display is displayed in the special mode or the symbol target mode in the total hold display unit 18c, suggested effect (pass pattern) at a rate of 0% Is determined not to be performed, and it is determined that the suggestion effect is performed in the first effect mode at a rate of 60%, and it is determined that the suggestion effect is performed in the second effect mode at a rate of 40%.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B), in this embodiment, when the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, that is, any hold display in the total hold display unit 18c is a special mode or a symbol target mode. When it is displayed in, the suggested rendering is performed at a higher rate than in the other cases. Therefore, the sense of expectation when the hold display is displayed in the special mode or the symbol target mode can be enhanced, and the game interest can be enhanced. In this embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed even when the display mode of the hold display changes, so that the suggestion effect is always executed when the hold display is displayed in the special mode or the symbol target mode. However, even when the hold display is displayed in the special mode or the symbol target mode, the suggestion effect may not be performed. However, in this case as well, it is desirable that the suggestion effect is performed at a higher rate than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode or the symbol target mode.

  Further, when the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, that is, when any hold display is displayed in the special mode or the symbol target mode in the total hold display unit 18c, the final display mode of the hold display is the first Depending on whether it is 1 special mode or the 2nd special mode, you may make it decide the production mode of suggestion production with the 1st production mode or the 2nd production mode with different ratio, the last indication of the reservation indication Depending on whether the aspect is the symbol first aspect or the symbol second aspect, the effect aspect of the suggested effect may be determined as the first effect aspect or the second effect aspect at different rates.

  For example, in the case where the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode in which the degree of expectation is higher than the first special mode or in the case in which the degree of expectation is higher than the pattern first aspect The rate at which the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined to be the second effect mode having a higher degree of expectation than the first effect mode may be increased. Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, display control in which an arrow flies from the right side of the display area is performed in the effect display device 9 as a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the suspension display changes. When the display mode of the hold display changes (in the case of the suggestion effect (success pattern)), display control is performed in which the flying arrow is stuck in the hold display corresponding to the hold information to be notified. Further, when the display mode of the hold display does not change (in the case of the suggestion effect (pass pattern)), display control is performed in which the flying arrow passes through the display area as it is. Therefore, in step S1806, as in step S1802f and step S1809 described later, it is not necessary to specify the hold display corresponding to the hold information to be notified, using the combined hold memory number counter for effect. Note that, for example, in the effect display device 9 as a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes at both the time when the display mode of the hold display is changed and when it is not the time. When it is the timing to change the display mode of the hold display by performing display control in which the arrow in which the arrow flew from the right side of the display area pierces the hold display corresponding to the hold information to be notified, the hold display When it is not the timing to change the display mode (corresponding to the suggestion effect (success pattern)) and to change the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display pierced by the arrow is not changed (the suggestion effect of this example (pass pattern Equivalent to)). In this case, in step S1806, as in step S1802f and step S1809 described later, the effect control CPU 101 identifies the pending display corresponding to the pending information to be notified using the combined pending memory number counter for effect. , The process table for executing the suggestion effect to the holding display identified in step S1807 may be selected, and the holding display to which the arrow is stuck is randomly determined from the displayed holding displays, and the decision is made. You may make it select the process table for performing the suggestion presentation with respect to a pending | holding display.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 selects a process table according to the effect mode and the fluctuation pattern of the determined effect effect (passing pattern) (step S1807).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the first command stored in the start winning command storage area (the oldest command set), that is, the symbol designating command of storage area 1 and the winning judgment determination result designating command (and When the reach symbol corresponding to these commands is stored, the reach symbol is deleted, and the contents of the start winning command storage area are shifted, and the first one in the combined hold storage display unit 18c The pending display is erased, and the remaining pending displays are shifted one by one to update the combined pending storage number display in the combined pending storage display unit 18c (step S1811). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the total hold storage display unit 18c are displayed, the first hold display is erased at the shift timing and the second hold display is displayed. The hold display is shifted to the first display area, the hold display displayed on the third is shifted to the second display area, and the hold display displayed on the fourth is the third display The hold display that has been shifted to the area and shifted to the fifth display is shifted to the fourth display area. In addition, when it is comprised so that priority is given to one of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol and the change display of it is executed, production control CPU101 is synchronized to the 1st special symbol fluctuation display When the fluctuation display of the effect design is executed (specifically, when the 1st design fluctuation specified command reception flag is set), the 1st one stored in the command storage area at the time of the 1st starting winning a prize Delete the set of eye commands and shift the contents of the first start winning command storage area. In addition, when the fluctuation display of the production symbol is executed synchronously with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (specifically, when the second symbol fluctuation specified command reception flag is set), the second start winning combination The first command set stored in the hour command storage area is deleted, and the content of the second start winning command storage area is shifted.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S1812).

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory view of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the effect device (component for effect) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating the mode of each variation constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect pattern, and data indicating the mode of the prefetching effect in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, The data etc. which show the aspect of are described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. In addition, data corresponding to parts for effects not to be controlled even though corresponding to the effect control process timer determination value (for example, pre-reading effects described in display control execution data of process table used when pre-reading effects are not executed The dummy data (data which does not designate control) may be set to the data which shows the mode of.

  The process table shown in FIG. 41 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

  In the process table used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, in the process table that is used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with the pseudo continuous effect, the middle symbol (the pseudo continuous symbol "NEXT") is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the establishment of the reach state. Process data is set to indicate that temporary stop is performed and then re-variation for fluctuating display of all the left, middle and right symbols is performed a predetermined number of times (1 to 3 times in this embodiment) There is. It should be noted that instead of setting symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying symbols are generated in combination according to the determined stop symbols and the pseudo stop symbols in the pseudo reunion and the slip effect. May be

  In addition, the CPU for effect control 101, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (effects display device 9 as effect parts, effect elements as effect parts Control of the various lamps and the speakers 27R and 27L as presentation parts is executed (step S1813). For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9, an instruction is output to the VDP 109. Further, in order to control various lamps to turn on / off, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. Further, in order to cause the speakers 27R and 27L to output sound, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

  In this embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 controls variable display of the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in a one-to-one manner, but the CPU 101 for effect control controls the fluctuation pattern command The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S1814), and processes the value of the effect control process flag during the production symbol fluctuation (step S802) To a value corresponding to (step S1815).

  When the value of the shift number counter is 1 in step S1802c (Y in step S1802c), it is confirmed whether or not the final display mode of the suspension display determined at the time of winning is the symbol second mode (step S1802d) . The final display mode of the hold display determined at the time of winning is stored in a storage area formed in the RAM. Here, in this embodiment, when it is decided to set the final display mode of the suspension display to the symbol second mode at the time of winning, the display mode of the suspension display is temporarily changed to the symbol first mode, and thereafter There is a case to change from the symbol first aspect to the symbol second aspect.

  Specifically, the final display mode (the final display mode determined at S67206) of the pending display determined at the time of winning is the second pattern pattern, and the number of shifts until the display mode is changed (determined at S67208 Based on the fact that the number of shifts is 2 or more, the display mode of the pending display, which is the target of the symbol pre-reading effect at a predetermined ratio, is changed to the first pattern at the timing when the number of shifts counter becomes 1. It is determined to be changed to the second pattern at the timing when the shift number counter becomes 0.

  When it is not determined that the final display mode of the suspension display determined at the time of winning is the symbol second mode (N in step S1802d), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the above-described step S1806. When it is determined that the final display mode of the suspension display determined at the time of winning is the symbol second mode (Y in step S1802d), the target of the symbol pre-reading effect and the predetermined proportion (for example, 60% proportion) The display mode of the pending display is determined to be temporarily changed to the symbol first mode by the change before it is changed to the symbol second mode (the shift number becomes 1) (Y in step S1802e), Do not change the display mode of the pending display that is the target of the symbol pre-reading effect at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 40%) by the change before it is changed to the second pattern (Ie, change from the normal mode or the special mode to the second pattern with the next change in which the shift number counter becomes 0 without going through the first pattern) (step) N in S1802e).

  In the case where the display mode of the pending display, which is the target of the symbol pre-reading effect, is not changed in the variation before it is changed to the final display mode (symbol second mode) (the shift number becomes 1) (N in step S1802e) The effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S1806 described above. The degree of expectation is higher than that of the final display mode in the change (change in which the shift number counter becomes 1) before changing the display mode of the suspension display, which is the target of the symbol pre-reading effect, to the final display mode (symbol second mode). When changing to a low mode (symbol first mode) (Y in step S1802e), CPU101 for production control, the first aspect of the display of the suspension display specified with the production mode of suggestion production and the total storage memory number counter for presentation A process table for display mode change according to the fluctuation pattern is selected (step S 1802 f). Then, the process proceeds to step S1811.

  In this embodiment, the effect mode of the suggestion effect in step S1802f is determined in S67210 or S67215 when it is determined in step S67206 that the final display mode of the target suspension display is the second pattern. It is assumed that it is the same as the effect mode of the suggested effect (effect mode stored in the storage area formed in the RAM). However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the effect mode of the suggested effect in step S 1802 f may be a effect mode different from the effect mode when changing to the final display mode (here, the second symbol pattern). . For example, based on the suggestion effect mode determination table of FIG. 35 (b), the effect mode of the suggestion effect in step S1802f is determined based on the storage area 2 (that is, the next change: variation serving as a target of symbol prereading effect) It may be determined again according to the designated command.

  Here, the reach symbol (a form of the left display information and the right display information constituting the suspension display) suggested in the symbol first mode of the suspension display is the effect of the total suspension storage number for effect in the start winning command storage area. The reach symbol (reach symbol stored in S67207 b) is stored in association with the symbol designation command (and winning determination result designation command) in the storage area corresponding to the value. Thus, two or more shifts are performed before changing to the final display mode even if it is determined that the final display mode of the suspension display is to be the second pattern in the determination at the time of winning. In this case, the display of the target is temporarily changed to the symbol first mode at a predetermined rate. Thereby, the player can expect to change to the symbol second mode even when the hold display is displayed in the symbol first mode, and the interest of the symbol pre-reading effect can be improved. .

  With the process table for display mode change, along with the fluctuation display of the production design, at the start of the fluctuation of the production design, execute the suggestion effect (success pattern) and execute the pre-reading effect to change the display mode of the specific hold display It is a table in which process data for performing control is set. In this embodiment, the type of indication effect (success pattern) to be executed or type of pre-reading effect (normal pre-reading effect or symbol pre-reading effect) and the aspect of pre-reading effect (change to the first special aspect or the second special aspect) or A process table for changing display modes is provided according to one mode or change to the second pattern.

  In this embodiment, an effect mode (in this example, the first effect mode or the first effect mode) of the suggestion effect (success pattern) determined in the prefetch effect determination process (step S67110 or S67210, or step S67115 or S67215) 2) A presentation of the presentation object specified by the presentation holding combination counter (for example, when the value of the presentation combination holding presentation number counter is 2), the second display of the combination holding presentation display unit 18c Last display mode (in this example, the first special mode or the second special mode, or the first pattern or the first pattern or the symbol) which is determined in the pre-reading effect determination process (step S67106 or S67206) and stored Based on the second aspect), further, the type of pre-reading effect is a symbol pre-reading performance If it is, the reach symbol specified by the counter for storage for total effect storage number of effects (for example, when the value of the counter for total number of suspension holding number for effect is 2, it is stored in the storage area 2 of the start winning command storage area) It is possible to specify in what manner the suggestion effect (success pattern) is executed and the pre-reading effect to change which pending display to what display mode is executed based on the reach pattern). Therefore, the CPU 101 for effect control further performs pre-read effect according to the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern), the final display mode of the on-hold display specified by the combined hold memory number counter for effect, and the fluctuation pattern. If the type is a symbol prefetching effect, one of a plurality of process patterns for display mode change is selected and selected according to the reach symbol specified by the counter for holding total number of stored effects for presentation By performing control of the rendering device in accordance with the contents of process data 1 of the process table for mode change, the suggestion effect (success pattern) is executed in the effect mode determined by the pre-reading effect determining process, and the change display of the notice object It is possible to execute the pre-reading effect of changing the hold display corresponding to the display mode to the determined display mode.

  If it is determined in step S1803 that the value of the shift number counter is 0, that is, if it is the change timing of the pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 sets the pre-reading effect restriction flag. If it is, it is reset (step S1808). By performing such a process, in this embodiment, it is possible to newly limit the execution of the pre-reading effect during the period in which the hold display is displayed in the special mode or the symbol target mode. It is possible to limit that the pending display is displayed in a special mode or a symbol target mode.

  Then, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the final display mode (the first special mode or the second special mode, or the symbol first mode or the symbol of the hold display specified by the effect mode of the suggestive effect and the total hold memory number counter for effects) A process table for display mode change time according to the second mode) and the fluctuation pattern is selected (step S1809). Then, the process proceeds to step S1811. The final display mode of the hold display determined at the time of winning is stored in the storage area formed in the RAM.

  Here, when the final display mode of the suspension display is the symbol first aspect or the symbol second aspect, the reach symbol suggested in the symbol first aspect or the symbol second aspect (left display information and right constituting the suspension display The display information aspect is stored in the start winning combination command storage area in association with the symbol designation command (and the winning determination result specification command) in the storage area corresponding to the value of the counter for total storage with effect for presentation Reach symbol (reach symbol stored in S67207 b).

  FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing a process during production design fluctuation (step S802) in the production control process. In the effect symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the process timer (step S1841) and subtracts one from the value of the variation time timer (step S1842). When the process timer times out (step S1843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S1844). Further, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step S1845).

  Next, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S1849), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S1851). Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination specification command has been received is set (step S1850), the process proceeds to step S1851. Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the control shifts to control to stop the fluctuation when the symbol determination designation command is received, so for example, the fluctuation pattern command showing a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards was received Even in such a case, it is possible to end the fluctuation of the effect pattern when the normal fluctuation time has elapsed (when the fluctuation of the special symbol is ended).

  In this embodiment, although the determination process including whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect is performed in the pre-reading effect determination process based on the reception of the winning determination result specification command, those processes are performed. It may be made to execute in processing during design change. For example, it is possible to execute the determination process including whether or not the pre-reading effect is performed by including the process of monitoring the winning determination result storage buffer in the effect symbol variation processing.

  FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing production design fluctuation stop processing (step S803) in production control process processing. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set (step S851). If the confirmation command reception flag is set, the confirmation command reception flag is reset. Then, control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol according to the data (data indicating the stop symbol) stored in the effect symbol display result storage area (step S853). Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit (step S855). Whether the jackpot or the jackpot has been determined is confirmed, for example, by the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. In this embodiment, it is also possible to confirm whether or not it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit according to the stop symbol being determined.

  If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S856).

  When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is made, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S857).

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variation (variable display) of the effect symbol on condition that the symbol determination designation command is received (see steps S851 and S853). However, when the fluctuation time timer based on the received fluctuation pattern command times out, control may be performed so as to end the fluctuation of the rendering symbol even without receiving the symbol determination designation command. In that case, the game control microcomputer 560 may not transmit the symbol determination designating command for designating the end of the variable display.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, the CPU for effect control 101 receives any of the big hit start designated command reception flags (a big hit start 1 designated command reception flag indicating that the big hit start 1 designated command has been received, and a big hit start 2 designated command Check whether the big hit start 2 specified command reception flag shown or the small hit / sudden positive change big hit start specified command received flag showing small hit / sudden definite change big hit start specified command is set (step S871) . If one of the big hit start designation command reception flags is set, control is performed to display a game start screen according to the set flags on the effect display device 9 (step S872). In addition, the set flag (big hit start 1 designated command reception flag, big hit start 2 designated command received flag, or small hit / sudden probability variable big hit start designated command received flag) is reset (step S873). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the big hit game (step S805) (step S874).

  In addition, the process process for the small hit display is provided separately from the process process for the big hit display, and in the case of the small hit, for example, for a predetermined period (the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds) Sufficient time (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be used to produce the same effect as in the sudden big hit.

  In addition, when it is a small hit or sudden definite strange big hit, instead of executing the production based on reception of a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designated command, the CPU 101 for production control, for example, for small hit / sudden definite strange big hit On the basis of the reception of the fluctuation pattern command of, the effect may be executed for a predetermined period to suggest that it is a small hit or a sudden positive change big hit. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 switches, for each process time, process data for performing an effect that suggests a small hit or a sudden probability variation big hit, and performs an effect according to the switched process data.

  In step S 872, the CPU for effect control 101 performs control to display a screen notifying the start of the big hit game on the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S806) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect processing, the CPU 101 for effect control checks whether or not the big hit end effect timer is set (step S 880). When the big hit end production timer is set, it moves to step S885. If the big hit end production timer is not set, the big hit end specified command reception flag (big hit end 1 specified command reception flag, big hit end 2 specified command received flag, small hit / sudden hit) which indicates that the big hit end specified command has been received Whether or not the definite variation big hit end designated command reception flag) is set is confirmed (step S881). If the big hit end specified command reception flag is set, the big hit end specified command received flag (big hit end 1 specified command received flag, big hit end 2 specified command received flag, or small hit / sudden definite variation big hit end specified command received flag ) Is reset (step S882), and a value corresponding to the big hit end display time is set in the big hit end effect timer (step S883), and the big hit end screen (screen notifying the end of the big hit game) on the effect display device 9 Is controlled (step S884). Specifically, the VDP 109 is instructed to display the big hit end screen.

  In step S885, the value of the big hit end effect timer is decremented by one. Then, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end effect timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end effect time has elapsed (step S886). If it has not, the process is ended. If the jackpot end effect time has elapsed, the effect control CPU 101 resets the prefetch effect restriction flag if it is set (step S887).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S892).

  Next, a specific example of pre-reading effect will be described. In the following description using FIGS. 47 to 49, the first special aspect or the second special aspect, which is the final display aspect, is the final display aspect of the hold display of the normal aspect based on the fact that it is determined to execute the normal pre-reading effect at the time of winning. An example to be changed and an example to be changed to the first special aspect or the second special aspect which is the final display aspect are shown.

  Here, in the following description, the "first special mode" is referred to as the "symbol first mode", the "second special mode" is referred to as the "symbol second mode", and the first special mode and the second special mode are collectively referred to The following explanation is based on the fact that it is decided to execute the symbol prereading effect at the time of winning by replacing the "special mode" used with the "pattern advance mode" and the "special mode" with the "pattern target mode". , An example of changing the hold display of the normal mode to the first display mode or the second design mode which is the final display mode, and the first display of the hold display of the graphic target mode the final display mode or the second special mode It can be applied to changing examples. However, in the example in which the number of shifts up to the change shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 is 2, when it is determined that the final display mode is the second pattern, the value of the shift number counter is 1 In the fluctuation (Y in step S1802c and Y in S1802d), it is determined that the symbol is not changed to the first pattern before the second pattern (N in step S1802e).

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of pre-reading effect based on the first pre-reading effect pattern. As shown in FIG. 47 (A), in the effect display device 9, the variation display of the effect pattern is being performed, and the two suspension displays are in the normal mode ("o" in this example) in the total suspension storage display unit 18c. When the start winning is performed when displayed, the aspect of the pre-reading effect (pre-reading effect pattern, final display aspect, change timing) and the aspect of the suggestion effect are determined, and a new hold display is displayed according to the determination result Ru. In the example shown in FIG. 47, the pre-reading effect pattern is determined as the first pre-reading effect pattern, the final display mode is determined as the first special mode or the second special mode, and the change timing is the start winning combination (shift number 0) or shift Determined to be 1 time. Further, the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

  In this embodiment, in the pre-reading effect based on the first pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified is not displayed in the special mode once, and the first display mode is displayed. It is displayed in the special mode or the second special mode. Also, the timing at which the hold indication is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode is the timing of the start winning or any shift timing. Therefore, when the change timing is determined at the start winning combination (the number of shifts is 0) and the final display mode is determined to the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 47 (B1), the timing of the start winning combination The third storage display is displayed on the storage storage display unit 18c in the first special mode (in this example, "x" is included in "o"). In addition, when the change timing is determined at the start winning combination (the number of shifts is 0) and the final display mode is determined to the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 47 (B2), the timing of the start winning combination The third storage display is displayed on the storage storage display unit 18c in a second special mode (in the present example, two “x” s are included in “o”).

  Also, even if the final display mode is the first special mode or the second special mode, the change timing is determined not to the start winning combination timing (the number of shifts 0) but to any shift timing (here, the number of shifts 1). In this case, as shown in FIG. 47 (B3), the third hold display is displayed in the normal mode ("o" in this example) on the total hold storage display unit 18c at the timing of the start winning. Then, when the variable display of the effect design is stopped (FIG. 47C) and the variable display based on the holding information corresponding to the first holding display is started, the first holding display is erased, and 2 The first and third pending displays are shifted respectively.

  At this time, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is determined to be the first effect mode, the suggested effect that suggests that the display mode of the suspension display is changed In the effect display device 9, display control is performed in which a black arrow flies from the right side of the display area (FIG. 47 (D1)).

  When the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 47 (E1), the second hold display of the total hold storage display unit 18c is performed at the shift timing (FIG. 47 (FIG. 47). An effect (suggestive effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode) in which a black arrow is pierced is performed at (B3), which corresponds to the pending display newly displayed in (B3), and the hold indication in which the black arrow is pierced is the first special mode (In this example, "x" is included in "o") and displayed. When the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 47 (E2), the second hold display of the total hold storage display unit 18c at the shift timing (FIG. 47 (FIG. 47) An effect (suggested effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode) in which a black arrow is pierced is performed on (B3), which corresponds to the hold indication newly displayed in (B3), and the hold indication in which the black arrow is pierced is the second special mode (In this example, two "x" s are included in "o") and displayed.

  In addition, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is determined to be the second effect mode, as the suggested effect that suggests that the display mode of the suspension display changes In the effect display device 9, display control is performed in which a white arrow flies from the right side of the display area (FIG. 47 (D2)).

  Then, if the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 47 (E3), the second hold display of the total hold storage display unit 18c at the shift timing (FIG. 47 (FIG. 47) A presentation (indication effect (success pattern) of the second presentation mode) in which a white arrow is pierced is performed at (B3) corresponding to the suspension display newly displayed in (B3), and the suspension display with the white arrow pierced is the first special mode (In this example, "x" is included in "o") and displayed. When the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 47 (E4), the second hold display of the total hold storage display unit 18c at the shift timing (FIG. 47 (FIG. 47) A presentation with a white arrow stuck to it (corresponding to the pending display newly displayed in (B3)) (indication effect in the second presentation mode (success pattern)) is performed, and the pending display with the white arrow stuck is the second special mode (In this example, two "x" s are included in "o") and displayed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is the second effect mode, the display mode of the pending display is the first compared to the case of the first effect mode. The rate of becoming the second special aspect having a high expectation of becoming a big hit than the one special aspect is configured to be high. Therefore, when the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is the first effect mode, that is, when the black arrow flies and is stuck in the hold display, the rate at which the hold display changes to the first special mode with low expectation is high. That is, the rate of transition from FIG. 47 (D1) to FIG. 47 (E1) is high. On the other hand, when the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is the second effect mode, that is, when the white arrow flies and is stuck in the hold display, the rate at which the hold display changes to the second special mode with high expectation is high. That is, the rate of transition from FIG. 47 (D2) to FIG. 47 (E4) is high. By being configured in this manner, even if the suggestion effect (success pattern) in which the arrow flies and sticks to the hold display makes it feel that it is desired to be performed in the second effect mode, and the suggestion effect is the first effect mode When a black arrow flies, it is possible to make the user feel that he / she wants you to pass without sticking to the hold display (I want a suggestion effect (pass pattern)).

  48 and 49 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of pre-reading effect based on the second pre-reading effect pattern. As shown in FIG. 48 (A), in the effect display device 9, the variation display of the effect pattern is being performed, and the two suspension displays are in the normal mode ("o" in this example) in the total suspension storage display unit 18c. When the start-up winning is performed when displayed, the pre-reading effect (pre-reading effect pattern, final display mode, change timing) and the indication effect mode are determined, and a new hold display is displayed according to the determination result. In the example shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the pre-reading effect pattern is determined as the second pre-reading effect pattern, the final display mode is determined as the first special mode or the second special mode, and the change timing is 1 shift number or 2 shift number Decide. Also, the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined to be the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

  In this embodiment, in the pre-reading effect based on the second pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning, and at any shift timing. , And displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode of the final display mode. Therefore, when the pre-reading effect pattern is determined to be the second pre-reading effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the third holding display is a special mode (total display hold storage 18c at the timing of start winning). In this example, six lines are drawn on the outside of “o”.

  Then, when the variable display of the effect design is stopped (FIG. 48C) and the variable display based on the holding information corresponding to the first holding display is started, the first holding display is erased, and 2 The first and third pending displays are shifted respectively. At this time, if the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined to be the second effect mode, a white arrow flies from the right side of the display area in the effect display device 9 as a suggested effect that suggests that the pending display changes. (Second Effect Mode) Display control is performed (FIG. 48 (D)).

  Here, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in (E1) in FIG. An effect (suggestive effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) is performed in which the second arrow display 18c (corresponding to the suspension display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 48 (B3)) is pierced by a white arrow. At the same time, the hold display in which the white arrow is stuck is changed and displayed from the special mode to the first special mode (in this example, "x" is included in "o"). Further, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 48 (E2), the combined hold storage display unit 18c is displayed at the shift timing. While the second arrow display (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 48 (B3)) is pierced with a white arrow (suggestion effect of the second game mode (success pattern)) is performed. The hold display with a white arrow is changed from the special mode to the second special mode (in this example, two "x" s are included in "o").

  Further, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2, as shown in FIG. 48 (E3), a suggested effect (second effect aspect in which the white arrow passes without sticking to any pending display at the shift timing) Suggested staging (passing pattern) is performed. In addition, the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 48 (E3) is performed when it is determined that the suggestion effect (passing pattern) is to be executed in the second effect mode in the effect symbol variation start process. As described above, in this embodiment, display control in which a black arrow (first effect mode) or a white arrow (second effect mode) is flung from the right side of the display area in the effect display device 9 as a suggested effect This suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes, and when the arrow bites into the hold display (when the suggestion effect (success pattern) is made), the display mode changes, and the arrow marks any hold display If it passes without passing (if suggestion effect (passing pattern) is performed), the display mode does not change.

  After that, when the fluctuation display of the production design is stopped (Fig. 49 (F)) and the fluctuation display based on the holding information corresponding to the first holding display is started, the first holding display is erased, and 2 The first pending display is shifted. At this time, a black arrow flies from the right side of the display area (first effect mode) display control in the effect display device 9 as a suggested effect that suggests that the pending display changes (FIG. 49 (G) ).

  When the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2 and the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 49 (H1), the total hold storage display unit 18c is at the shift timing. Along with the effect (suggested effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode) in which a black arrow is stuck on the first pending display of (corresponding to the suspension display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 48 (B3)) , The hold display with a black arrow is changed and displayed from the special mode to the first special mode (in this example, "x" is included in "o"). When the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2 and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 49 (H2), the total hold storage display unit 18c is at the shift timing. Along with the effect (suggested effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) in which a black arrow is stuck on the first hold display of (corresponding to the suspension display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 48 (B3)) , And the display with the black arrow stuck is changed from the special mode to the second special mode (in this example, two "x" s are included in "o").

  As shown in FIG. 47, in this embodiment, in the pre-reading effect based on the first pre-reading effect pattern, the pending display corresponding to the variable display (pending information) to be notified is temporarily displayed without being displayed in the special mode. , The first special mode or the second special mode of the final display mode. At this time, the timing displayed in the final display mode includes an arbitrary shift timing in addition to the timing of the start winning. Also, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, in the pre-reading effect based on the second pre-reading effect pattern, the pending display corresponding to the variable display (pending information) to be notified is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning. It is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode of the final display mode at any shift timing. As described above, in this embodiment, since it is possible to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings, various timings can be used to change the display mode of the hold display. When the pending display is displayed in a special mode, the pending display may be displayed in the first special mode or the first special mode or the first special mode before the variable display based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending display is started. (2) Since the game is changed to the special mode and displayed, the game entertainment can be improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the display result and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display at the time of the start winning, which is realized by executing the effect processing at the time of winning, etc. It has the means. In addition, the microcomputer 100 for effect control is realized by executing pre-reading effect determination processing, effect design fluctuation start processing and the like, and based on the determination result by the determination means, the pending display corresponding to the pending storage (total pending storage display The effect execution means is provided to execute the pre-reading effect for displaying the reserve storage in the unit 18c in the first special mode or the second special mode. Then, the effect executing means can change the hold display into the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings (timing of start winning, shift timing, etc.) and can display the hold display as a special mode. Control is performed to change and display the hold display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode until the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is started. It is configured to By being configured in this way, it is possible to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings, so various display timings of the hold display can be changed. While changing the hold display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode when the hold display can be displayed in a special mode, it is possible to improve the fun of the game. it can.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 suggests whether or not the display mode of the pending display changes, which is realized by executing the pre-reading effect determination process, the effect symbol variation start process, and the like. It has a suggestion effect execution means for executing the indication effect (indication effect (success pattern) and indication effect (pass pattern)). Then, the suggestion effect execution means is configured to execute the suggestion effect at a higher frequency when the hold display is displayed in the special mode than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode. With such a configuration, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the suggestion effects are executed at a high frequency, so that the sense of expectation can be enhanced, and the game interest can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the determination means determines that the display result is a big hit, the effect execution means corresponds to the pending storage that is the determination target at a high ratio compared to when it is determined that the big hit does not occur. Display the pending display in the second special mode. In addition, when effect presentation means performs pre-reading effect with the 2nd pre-reading effect pattern which changes and displays a suspension display from a special mode to a 1st special mode or a 2nd special mode, it does not display a suspension display in a special mode. The hold display is configured to be displayed in the second special mode at a higher rate than when performing the prefetching effect in the first preview effect pattern displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode. By being configured in this way, when the pending display is displayed in a special mode, the percentage displayed in the second special mode having a high expectation of becoming a big hit is increased, so that a sense of expectation can be enhanced. Game interest can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, it is determined that the pre-reading effect is to be executed with the second pre-reading effect pattern, and the change execution timing is determined to be the winning time (the number of changes is 0). The first display of the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the timing of start winning) and the first timing until the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is started (for example, the first hold display shift is The first special aspect or the second special aspect from the special aspect from the special aspect from the special aspect from the special aspect from the special aspect from the special aspect from the special aspect from the special aspect from the special aspect from the timing at which the timing is performed) or the second timing (for example, It is possible to change and display. Then, the effect executing means determines that the hold display is made at the first timing or the second timing at a different ratio at a different ratio depending on whether the judgment means judges that the judgment result is a big hit and the judgment result is not a big hit. It is comprised so that it may be changed and displayed to 1 special aspect or a 2nd special aspect. By being configured in this manner, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the display mode changes, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 is realized by executing the process of setting the pre-reading effect restriction flag, and when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the hold display is newly added. It is comprised so that the limitation means which limits displaying in an aspect may be provided. By being configured in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to which hold display should be focused when a plurality of hold displays are displayed in a special mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the determination means determines that the display result is a big hit, the effect execution means makes the pending storage that is the determination target at a higher rate than when it is determined not to be a big hit. Display the corresponding hold indication in the second special mode. Further, the effect executing means performs the first effect (e.g., a black arrow) when performing pre-reading effect with the first pre-reading effect pattern to be displayed by changing the holding display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. When performing a suggestion effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode to fly and stick to the hold display, and changing the hold display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode, and the first effect Performs a different second effect (for example, a suggestive effect (success pattern) of a second effect aspect in which a white arrow flies and sticks to a retention indication), and changes the suspension indication from the special aspect to the first special aspect or the second special aspect There are times when it makes it display. And, the effect executing means is configured to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at different rates depending on when the first effect is performed and the second effect is performed. ing. By being configured in such a manner, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, it is possible to pay attention to which of the first effect and the second effect is performed, and to improve the game interest it can.

(Specific example of symbol pre-reading effect)
Next, a specific example when the symbol pre-reading effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. In (1) of FIG. 50, the total number of pending storages is 2 and two pending displays of the normal mode are displayed on the combined pending storage display unit 18c, and the left symbol display area 9L, the middle symbol display area 9C, And the example in which the fluctuation display of the production | presentation pattern is performed is shown in 9 R of right symbol display areas, respectively. At this time, a new winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 occurs, and the judgment at the time of winning determines that the display result is a positive change big hit, and the fluctuation pattern is a false relic 2 super hit. It shall be decided. Further, it is decided to execute the symbol pre-reading effect, the final display mode is decided to be the symbol second mode, the pre-reading effect pattern is decided to be the second pre-reading effect pattern (that is, the symbol target mode is displayed at the time of winning) After that, it is decided to change to the symbol preview mode), the reach symbol is determined to be "7", and the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2. Then, it is assumed that the suggestion effect mode at the time of change is determined as the suggestion effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode (a white arrow flies from the right side of the display area).

  At this time, the total number of pending storages is 3, and the third pending display is displayed in the symbol target mode based on the determination of the second pre-reading effect pattern ((2) in FIG. 50). Then, it is assumed that the variable display of the effect pattern is finished, and “517” is derived and displayed as the display result ((3) in FIG. 50). Next, with the variable display of the effect design being started, the total number of pending storages is reduced to 2 and the pending display of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is shifted left one by one (see FIG. 4). Then, based on the value of the shift number counter becoming 1, the symbol first according to the fluctuation (the value that the value of the shift number counter becomes 1) before changing to the symbol second mode which is the final display mode. It is decided to change to the aspect.

  At this time, based on the fact that it is decided to execute the suggested effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode, an effect is performed in which a white arrow flies from the right side of the display area ((4) in FIG. 50). An effect is performed in which a flying white arrow is stuck on the second hold display (pattern target mode) ((5) in FIG. 50). Here, the position of the hold display where the arrow is pierced can be specified by the value (2: second from the left) of the combined hold memory number counter for effect. Then, the second hold display with the arrow stuck changes from the symbol target mode to the symbol first mode ((6) in FIG. 50). At this time, based on the determination of “7” as the reach symbol, the second hold display is the symbol first mode in which the left display information and the right display information simulate “7”.

  Then, it is assumed that the variable display of the effect design is finished, and “214” is derived and displayed as the display result ((7) in FIG. 51). Next, with the variable display of the effect design being started, the total number of pending storages is reduced to 1 and the pending display of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is shifted to the left by one (see FIG. 8). Then, on the basis of the value of the shift number counter becoming 0, a suggestive effect (success pattern) for changing to the symbol second mode which is the final display mode is executed.

  At this time, based on the fact that it is decided to execute the suggested effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode, an effect is performed in which a white arrow is flying from the right side of the display area ((8) in FIG. 51). An effect is performed in which a flying white arrow is stuck on the first hold display (symbol target mode) ((9) in FIG. 51). Here, the position of the suspension display where the arrow is pierced can be identified by the value (1: first from the left) of the combined suspension storage number counter for effect. And the 1st pending | holding display which the arrow pierced changes from the symbol 1st aspect to the symbol 2nd aspect ((10) of FIG. 51). At this time, based on the fact that "7" is determined as the reach symbol, the first hold display is "7" for the left display information and the right display information, and the middle display information is the pseudo run symbol "NEXT". It becomes the imitation symbol second aspect.

  Then, it is assumed that the variation display of the effect pattern is finished, and “358” is derived and displayed as the display result ((11) in FIG. 51). Then, with the variable display of the production symbol being started, the total number of pending storages is reduced to 0, and the pending display (the second pattern of the symbol) of the left end of the combined pending storage display unit 18c is erased (figure 51 (12)). That is, the variable display which becomes a target of symbol pre-reading effect will be started. Here, when the variable display serving as the target of the symbol pre-reading effect is started, the symbol designating command of storage area 1 (corresponding to the pending display of the second pattern of the symbol) in the start prize winning command storage area A reach symbol (here, “7”) is stored in association with the determination result designation command, and the reach symbol (here, “7”) and the received display result designation command (here, the probability variation big hit designation And the fluctuation pattern command (here, designated per pseudo run 2 super) are consistent. Based on this, the reach symbol in the variable display is determined to be the memory reach symbol (here, “7”), and the stop symbol is the probability symbol big hit symbol according to the reach symbol and the display result designation command (probable variation big hit designation) Here, "777" is determined, and the temporary stop symbol is determined to be the temporary stop symbol (here, "7-NEXT-7") according to the reach symbol.

  Then, in the variable display (two temporary stops) serving as the target of symbol pre-reading effect, reach symbols (here, "7") are stopped in the left symbol display area 9L and the right symbol display area 9R, and the first reach state is established. ((13) in FIG. 52). The reach symbol at this time is a reach symbol determined based on the memory reach symbol (determined at the start winning combination) at the start of the change. Then, after the first reach state is established, the pseudo run symbol "NEXT" is stopped in the middle symbol display area 9C, and the combination of the temporary stop symbols is completed ((14) in FIG. 52: first temporary stop). After that, all of the left, middle and right rendition symbols re-variate ((15) in FIG. 52: first re-variation).

  Then, in the variable display which is the target of the symbol pre-reading effect, the reach symbol ("7" in this case) is stopped in the left symbol display area 9L and the right symbol display area 9R, and the second reach state is established (FIG. 52) (16)). The reach symbol at this time is a reach symbol determined based on the memory reach symbol (determined at the start winning combination) at the start of the change. Then, after establishment of the second reach state, the pseudo run symbol "NEXT" is stopped in the middle symbol display area 9C, and the combination of the temporary stop symbols is completed ((17) in Fig. 52: second temporary stop) . After that, all of the left, middle and right rendition symbols re-variate ((18) in FIG. 52: second re-variation).

  Then, in the variable display which is the target of the symbol pre-reading effect, the reach symbol ("7" in this case) stops in the left symbol display area 9L and the right symbol display area 9R, and the last (third) reach state is established. ((19) in FIG. 53). The reach symbol at this time is a reach symbol determined based on the memory reach symbol (determined at the start winning combination) at the start of the change. Then, after the final (third) reach state is established, the character of the ally and the enemy character appear to develop into a battle effect of super reach where the battle is performed ((20) in FIG. 53).

  In the super reach battle rendition, the ally character and the enemy character battle, and the possibility of a big hit is suggested according to which character is superior ((21) in FIG. 53). For example, in the case where the ally character is dominant, the effect execution ratio is determined so that the ratio of the big hit becomes higher than the case where the enemy character is dominant. Then, based on the received display result designation command (here, the probability variation big hit designation) and the fluctuation pattern command (here, the pseudo run 2 super hit designation), a victory effect in which the ally character beats the enemy character is executed (see FIG. 53 (22), a stop symbol (here, "777") determined based on the memory reach symbol at the start of fluctuation as the stop symbol will be derived and displayed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the variable display corresponding to the pending storage based on the start winning is started The reach symbol displayed in the left symbol display area 9L and the right symbol display area 9R at the formation timing of the reach state in the variable display, and the left symbol display area 9L and the right symbol display area 9R at the temporary stop timing in the variable display It is made to indicate the reach symbol displayed on the screen and the pseudo consecutive symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 9C. Therefore, it becomes possible to raise the interest to the representation pattern displayed in the target variable display, and in particular, the target target variable display is in the reach state or the pseudo base effect by suggesting the reach symbol and the pseudo serial symbol. It is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the accompanying fluctuation pattern.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the display mode of the suspension display is changed to the first pattern of symbol display (reach symbol advance notice) or the second mode of symbol display (simulated continuous symbol advance notice), thereby displaying the variable display corresponding to the suspension display. Since it is made to suggest the symbol to be played, it becomes easy for the player to grasp in which variation display the symbol to be suggested is displayed, and the symbol and the variation display suggested Correspondence relationship with becomes clear. Further, as in this embodiment, by temporarily maintaining the display mode of the pending display that has once changed, until the variable display corresponding to the pending display is started, it can be expected to be displayed in the variable display. While being able to grasp a design more easily, a rendering effect can be enhanced, an interest in the variable display can be further enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the pending display is configured from left display information corresponding to left symbol display area 9L, middle display information corresponding to middle symbol display area 9C, and right display information corresponding to right symbol display area 9R. The symbol displayed in the symbol display area corresponding to each display information in the variable display corresponding to the pending display is suggested. That is, the player can easily grasp the symbols that can be expected to be displayed for each of the plurality of symbol display areas, and the player's interest can be attracted to the aspect of each display information.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, even if the display mode of the hold display displayed at the time of winning is the normal mode, the display may be changed to the first pattern pattern or the second pattern pattern. Even in this case, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the display mode. Moreover, in this embodiment, when the display mode of the suspension display displayed at the time of winning is the symbol target mode, the symbol display mode is changed to the symbol first mode or the symbol second mode, and the player is displayed in the display mode. Can attract interest. In addition, even if the display mode of the suspension display displayed at the time of winning is a mode that does not indicate any symbol displayed in any symbol display area (a normal mode and a symbol target mode), any symbol display area Since it may change to the aspect which suggests the symbol displayed on, it is possible not to lose the player's expectation for the variable display corresponding to such a hold display.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the left symbol display area 9L and the right symbol display are taken from the symbol first aspect in which only the reach symbol displayed in the left symbol display area 9L and the right symbol display area 9R is displayed. Because there is a possibility that the reach symbol displayed in the area 9R and the symbol second mode suggesting the pseudo run symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 9C may be changed, the display mode of the suspension display changed to the symbol first mode Also, it is possible to make it expect to change to the second symbol aspect, and to keep the player's interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is set such that the ratio of the variation pattern of reach with pseudo-series effect to the big hit is higher than the variation pattern of reach without pseudo-series effect as the variation pattern of the variable display. Therefore, the player expects that the display mode of the hold display changes to the second symbol mode more than the first symbol mode. And, in this embodiment, when the display mode of the suspension display corresponding to the variable display of 1 does not change to the second pattern after the first display becomes the first pattern (i.e., suggesting the pseudo consecutive symbols after suggesting the reach pattern) The display mode of the suspension display is the symbol because there is the case where it does not occur and the case where it changes to the symbol second mode after becoming the symbol first mode (that is, the case where the pseudo symbol is further suggested after suggesting reach symbol). Even after becoming the first aspect, the player's interest can be maintained as to whether or not the symbol second aspect is further changed.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the hold display changes from the normal mode to the special mode (when the normal pre-reading effect is executed) and from the normal mode to the symbol notice mode (pattern pre-reading effect) When the display mode of the hold display is the normal mode, the player determines which type of pre-reading effect is performed (or none of them is performed). And the player's interest can be attracted to changes in the display mode of the hold display.

[Modification]
Finally, an embodiment (modification) different from the above embodiment will be illustrated.

  (1) In the above embodiment, the pseudo run symbol (the character symbol of "NEXT") is variably displayed in the symbol display area, unlike the other effect symbols (the numeral symbols of "1" to "9") Although the example which is the production design displayed at the timing of temporary stop instead of the production design which is present was described, the production design displayed at the timing of temporary stop is not limited to such a form, the production design being displayed in a variable manner It may be included in For example, a combination of numeral symbols variably displayed in each symbol display area may be used as a combination of temporary stop symbols. For example, a big hit such as "1-1-2" or "5-5-6" You may make it use the combination of the production | presentation design called the predetermined chance eyes different from a design. Moreover, when using the combination of the temporary stop symbols comprised by the production symbols variably displayed in this way, it is displayed at the timing of temporary stop in the left symbol display area 9L by the aspect of the left display information which comprises pending display. It is displayed at the timing of temporary stop in the middle symbol display area 9C according to the mode of middle display information which suggests the effect design (for example, "1" and "5" which are the left symbols of the chance eye) A production symbol that is displayed at the timing of temporary stop in the right symbol display area 9R according to the mode of the right display information that suggests the presentation symbol (for example, "1" or "5" which is the middle symbol of the chance eye) (For example, "2" or "6" which is the right symbol of the chance eye) may be suggested.

  (2) In the above embodiment, an example has been described that suggests the effect symbol displayed in each symbol display area at the timing when the reach state is established or at the timing of temporary stop in the variable display to be the object of symbol prereading effect. Not limited to such a form, for example, to suggest a production symbol (for example, part or all of a combination of jackpot symbols such as "777") that will be the final display result in the variable display that is the target of symbol pre-reading effect You may In addition, for example, it may be possible to suggest an effect design displayed at a timing when a specific effect such as a specific character appears in a variable display or a movable role moves.

  (3) In the above embodiment, by changing the display mode of the hold display, it suggests the effect pattern displayed at a specific timing (the establishment timing of the reach state or the temporary stop timing) in the variable display corresponding to the hold display. Although the example to do is demonstrated, you may make it suggest the production | presentation symbol displayed by specific timing in the fluctuation | variation display which is not performed by the suggestion effect which does not change the display mode of a pending | holding display. For example, as in the examples shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55 described later, using the display area (a part of the symbol display area) other than the combined hold storage display unit 18c, reach symbols or You may make it perform the suggestion production which suggests a pattern. Further, as in the examples shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 described later, in addition to the suggestion effects of changing the display mode of the hold display, the suggestion effects not depending on the display mode of the hold display are also executed in this way It is good. In addition, a plurality of suspension displays corresponding to 1 variable display (1 suspension storage) are provided (for example, two of a suspension display of a normal mode and a suspension display of a symbol target mode) are provided, By changing only the display mode of the pending display (for example, the pending display of the symbol target aspect), it is suggested to indicate the effect pattern displayed at a specific timing in the variable display corresponding to the pending display (and the other pending display). You may

  (4) In the above embodiment, an example has been described that suggests a rendering symbol displayed at a specific timing in two or more symbol display areas of three symbol display areas, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a plurality exist It is possible to suggest an effect pattern to be displayed at a specific timing in at least one of the symbol display areas to be displayed. For example, even if it is determined that the variation pattern is accompanied by a reach at the start winning combination, only the symbols displayed at the timing when the reach state is established in the left symbol display area 9L are suggested, and in the right symbol display area 9R A mode may be adopted in which the symbol displayed at the timing when the reach state is established is not suggested (for example, the display mode of the hold display is 7-?-?).

  (5) In the above embodiment, at the timing when a new start winning for the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 occurs, the symbol is displayed with the pending display (variation display) corresponding to the starting winning for a target Although the example which determines whether pre-reading effect is performed was demonstrated, it is not limited to such a form, It does not determine whether or not pre-rendering effect of a symbol is performed at the timing when the start winning is generated. Whether or not to execute the symbol advance reading effect is determined based on the command at the time of the start winning such as the symbol designating command corresponding to the pending storage which is already stored and the command at the time of winning at the start of the variable display. You may do so.

  A specific example thereof will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. In (1) of FIG. 54, the total number of pending storages is 3, and three pending displays of the normal mode are displayed on the combined pending storage display portion 18c, and the left symbol display area 9L, the middle symbol display area 9C, And the example in which the fluctuation display of the production | presentation pattern is performed is shown in 9 R of right symbol display areas, respectively. Then, it is assumed that the variable display of the effect pattern is ended, and “517” is derived and displayed as the display result ((2) in FIG. 54).

  Next, in the determination when a new change display is started, the symbol designation command corresponding to the second hold display after shift (the change display to be executed next to the change display after that) designates a probability change big hit It is assumed that it is decided to execute the symbol pre-reading effect based on the fact that the winning combination determination result designation command designates the pseudo rerun double super hit. That is, the variable display corresponding to the second hold display after the shift is determined as the target of the symbol pre-reading effect. And the final display mode of the said pending | holding display shall be determined as a symbol 2nd aspect, and the reach symbol in the fluctuation display corresponding to the said pending | holding display shall be determined to "7". Furthermore, based on the fact that there are two shifts of grace before the final display mode of the pending display is determined to be the second pattern and the final display mode is changed to the final display mode, the newly displayed variable display It is assumed that it is decided to change the display mode to the symbol first mode.

  Next, with the variable display of the effect design being started, the total number of pending storages is reduced to 2 and the pending display of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is shifted left one by one (see FIG. 3)). At the timing of shifting the hold display, the display mode of the hold display to be the target of the symbol pre-reading effect is changed to the symbol target mode ((3) in FIG. 54). Along with this, a display area is provided on the right side of the screen for giving a notice of the effect pattern displayed at a specific timing (the timing of reaching the reach state and the temporary stop timing) in the variable display corresponding to the pending display. 3)). In this example, the rendering symbol is to be notified in a frame displayed as "symbol prefetch mode".

  While the variable display is being executed, the left display information, the middle display information, and the right display information constituting the hold display of the symbol target aspect are displayed within the frame of the “pattern prefetch mode”. The characters “?” Are filled in the left cylinder, middle cylinder and right cylinder respectively ((4) in FIG. 54), and then fireworks are launched from the left cylinder, middle cylinder and right cylinder (FIG. 54) (5) The fireworks opened from the left cylinder (corresponding to the left display information) are opened to announce the symbol "7", and the fireworks launched from the right cylinder (corresponding to the left display information) are opened " By giving notice of the symbol of 7 ", the reach symbol" 7 "is announced. Here, the fireworks fired from the middle cylinder (corresponding to the middle display information) do not open and the symbol is not notified. Along with this, while the left display information and the right display information constituting the second hold display change to the aspect of “7”, the middle display information does not change ((6) in FIG. 54). As described above, the display mode of the suspension display corresponding to the next next variable display (that is, the variable display serving as the target of the symbol pre-reading effect) changes from the symbol target mode to the symbol first mode. In the inside, the reach symbol displayed at the establishment timing of the reach state in the next next variable display will be notified in advance.

  Then, it is assumed that the variable display of the effect pattern is ended, and “214” is derived and displayed as the display result ((7) in FIG. 55). Then, it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display after shift (the variable display to be executed next to the variable display) is changed to the final display mode in the determination when the new variable display is started. . That is, based on the fact that it is the last variation display capable of changing the display mode of the target hold display, the hold display of the first pattern symbol is changed to the second pattern symbol. Along with the start of the variation display of the effect design, the total number of pending storages is reduced to one, and the pending display of the combined pending storage display unit 18c is shifted to the left one by one ((8) in FIG. 55). ).

  While the variable display is being executed, the left display information, the middle display information, and the right display information constituting the hold display of the first pattern of symbols within the frame of the “pattern prefetching mode” are simulated “7” Among the letters "?" And "7", only the letter "?" Corresponding to the unchanged middle display information is filled in the middle cylinder ((9) in FIG. 55), and then the fireworks are launched from the middle cylinder ((10) in FIG. 55), the fireworks (corresponding to middle display information) launched from the middle cylinder are opened to give notice of the "NEXT" symbol. Along with this, the middle display information configuring the first hold display changes to the form of “NEXT” ((11) in FIG. 55). As described above, the display mode of the suspension display corresponding to the next variable display (that is, the variable display serving as the target of the symbol pre-reading effect) changes to the second pattern through the first pattern pattern, and the frame of "pattern reading mode" In the inside, the combination of the temporary stop symbol displayed at the temporary stop timing in the next variable display will be notified. Then, it is assumed that the variable display of the effect pattern is finished, and “214” is derived and displayed as the display result ((12) in FIG. 55). In addition, the effect mode after this is the same as the effect mode after (12) in FIG.

  (6) As described above, based on the command for starting winning such as the symbol designating command and the winning time determination result designating command which are already stored at the timing other than the timing of starting winning (in the above example, the timing of fluctuation start). It is also possible to decide whether or not to execute the symbol pre-reading effect. In this way, for example, it becomes possible to execute the symbol pre-reading effect for the pending display whose display mode has already changed to the special mode (the first special mode or the second special mode), and the special mode It is also possible to change the pending display of the symbol to the symbol preview mode (symbol first aspect or symbol second aspect). That is, from the state (the first special mode or the second special mode) suggested to be a big hit in the variable display corresponding to the hold display by the display mode of the hold display, the hold display according to the display mode of the hold display It is possible to change to a state (a symbol first aspect or a symbol second aspect) in which a symbol displayed at a specific timing in the variable display corresponding to the symbol is suggested (diversity indication).

  (7) In addition, based on the command at the time of the start winning such as the symbol specification command which is already stored at the timing other than the time of the start winning (in the above example, the timing at the start of fluctuation) It may be determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect usually. By doing in this way, for example, it becomes possible to execute a normal pre-reading effect for the pending display whose display mode has already changed to the symbol notice mode (pattern first mode or symbol second mode), and the symbol It is also possible to change the hold indication of the advance notice mode to the special mode (the first special mode or the second special mode). That is, from the state (symbol first aspect or symbol second aspect) in which the symbol displayed at a specific timing is suggested in the variable display corresponding to the pending display by the display mode of the pending display, the relevant display mode of the pending display It is possible to change to a state (first special aspect or second special aspect) in which the possibility of becoming a big hit is indicated by the variable indication corresponding to the hold indication, and it is possible to diversify the pre-reading effect.

  (8) Also, contrary to the example shown in (6), the symbol pre-reading only for the pending display which is determined not to change the display mode to the special mode (the first special mode or the second special mode) A presentation may be performed. According to this, it is possible to expect to change to the symbol advance notice mode (the first symbol pattern or the second symbol pattern) even if the pending display does not change to the special mode, and it is possible for the player's pre-reading effect It can keep you interested.

  (9) In addition, contrary to the example shown in (7), it is normal only for the pending display which is determined not to change the display mode to the symbol advance notice mode (pattern first mode or symbol second mode). The preread effect may be executed. According to this, it is possible to expect to change to the special mode (the first special mode or the second special mode) even if the hold display does not change to the symbol preview mode, and it is possible to expect the player's pre-reading effect. It can keep you interested.

  (10) In the above embodiment, when it is determined to execute the pre-reading effect, a predetermined ratio (for example, 50 for all of them) which is determined in advance whether the normal pre-reading effect or the symbol pre-reading effect is to be performed. An example of determining based on the percentage) has been described, but the invention is not limited to such a form, and it may be determined according to the gaming state, for example, whether it is a definite change state or a time saving state. Alternatively, in the case of the probability change state or the time saving state, the symbol pre-reading effect may be executed at a rate higher than that in the normal state.

  (11) In the above embodiment, when it is determined that the final display mode of the suspension display is the second pattern pattern, (i) the display mode of the suspension display is the first pattern temporarily from the normal mode or the symbol target mode A common effect (for example, any of the suggested effects when changing to a mode and (ii) the suggested effects when changing the display mode of the suspension display from the symbol first mode to the symbol second mode which is the final display mode Also in the right of the screen, a white arrow flew from the right of the screen and described an example in which it is stuck in the hold display of the target), but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the suggested effects of (i) and (ii) It may be different. For example, in (i), the suggested effect is the effect that a black arrow flies from the right of the screen and sticks to the hold display of the target, but in the suggested effect of (ii), the white arrow flies from the right of the screen and the target It may be an effect of stabbing on the hold display of.

  (12) In the above embodiment, the method of determining the pre-reading effect pattern (the first pre-reading effect pattern or the second pre-reading effect pattern) in the normal pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern in the symbol pre-reading effect (the first pre-reading effect pattern or the second An example in which the method of determining the pre-read effect pattern) is the same as that described above has been described, but the method of determining the pre-read effect pattern in the pre-read effect and the pre-read effect pattern in the pre-pattern effect is different. For example, a pre-reading effect pattern determination table with different execution rates may be used.

  (13) In the above embodiment, an example was described in which the method of determining the change timing (number of shifts) in normal pre-reading effect and the method of determining the change timing (number of shifts) in symbol pre-reading effect are common. The method of determining the change timing in the normal pre-reading effect and the method of determining the change timing in the symbol pre-reading effect may be different, for example, the pre-reading effect change timing determination table having a different execution ratio is used Also good.

  (14) In the above embodiment, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display is not limited to the effect of an arrow biting, but is an effect such that a character appears and an action of changing the display mode of the hold display is performed. Also good. Further, the rate at which the display mode changes or the rate at which the display mode changes to a high expectation may be different depending on the type of the character that appears.

  (15) In the above embodiment, an example was described in which the pending display corresponding to the variable display is erased at the timing when the variable display is started, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the variable display is started Accordingly, the hold display corresponding to the variable display may be shifted to the variable display corresponding display area while the display mode is maintained, and may be displayed as the variable display corresponding display. According to this, it is possible to easily grasp the effect pattern that can be expected to be displayed at a specific timing in the variable display being executed by the aspect of the variable display correspondence display.

  (16) Further, when the variable display correspondence display area is displayed in the variable display correspondence display area in this way, the display mode of the variable display correspondence display is changed from the normal mode or the special mode to the special mode, The normal mode or the symbol target mode may be changed to the symbol advance mode. According to this, since the display mode of the variable display corresponding display may change even when the variable display is started, the player's interest can be maintained.

  (17) In the above embodiment, although the symbol (for example, reach symbol or pseudo sequence symbol) once suggested is not changed after that, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the symbol once suggested is thereafter It may be changed. For example, even when an even symbol is suggested as a reach symbol, an effect of changing the reach symbol to an odd symbol may be executed thereafter. That is, some or all of the suggested symbols may be changed.

  (18) In the above embodiment, when the effect control microcomputer 100 determines to execute the symbol pre-reading effect, an example in which the reach symbol to be suggested is also determined is described. However, the present invention is limited to such an embodiment. Instead, the reach symbol is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, and the symbol for suggesting the reach symbol according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the prize determination result specification command in the effect control microcomputer 100 side in the symbol pre-reading effect You may Further, in the game control microcomputer 560 side, when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start winning game, the reach symbol is determined together, and the determined reach symbol is notified to the effect control microcomputer 100. Also good. In addition, the reach pattern according to the fluctuation pattern is stored beforehand in the effect control microcomputer 100 side, and the reach pattern according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the winning time judgment result specification command received from the game control microcomputer 560 You may decide to

  (19) In the above embodiment, when a power failure of the effect control microcomputer 100 occurs when the hold display is displayed in the special mode or the symbol notice mode, the power source of the effect control microcomputer 100 is again generated. When supplied and operated, it is assumed that all pending displays of the number corresponding to the total pending storage number are displayed in the normal mode. Note that by displaying all the pending displays of the number according to the combined pending memory number in the normal mode, the player has an impression as if all the pending memories can not be expected, so this is prevented. In order to achieve this, the reserved display may be displayed in a predetermined recovery mode (for example, a predetermined color such as gray or a predetermined shape such as "?").

  (20) Further, in the above embodiment, when the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, neither the normal pre-reading effect nor the symbol pre-reading effect is executed, and therefore any pending display is special. When displayed in a manner, no other hold display is displayed in the symbol target mode, and when any hold display is displayed in the symbol target mode, the other hold display is special. It is not displayed in an aspect. That is, it is limited that a plurality of pending displays are displayed in different modes of the special mode and the symbol target mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to which hold display to pay attention to. Not limited to such a form, the display in the symbol target aspect may be enabled during the period in which the display in the special aspect is restricted, and the display in the special aspect may be performed in the period where the display in the symbol target aspect is restricted It may be possible.

  (21) In the above embodiment, an example is described in which one rendering symbol is stopped or displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 9L, the middle symbol display area 9C, and the right symbol display area 9R. Not limited to such a form, a plurality of effect symbols may be stopped or displayed temporarily in each symbol display area. For example, display areas of three effect symbols in the upper, middle, and lower may be provided in each symbol display area, and in this case, in the symbol pre-reading notice, the upper, middle, and lower of each symbol display area It is preferable to suggest an effect pattern to be displayed in a stop display or a temporary stop in any one of the three display areas.

  (22) In the above embodiment, the combination of the temporary stop symbols is configured from the reach symbol (the left symbol and the right symbol are common) and the pseudo symbol (middle symbol), and the symbol symbol stops after the reach state is established. Although the combination of the pseudo run symbol was completed by doing and the example which becomes a temporary stop (and subsequent re-fluctuation) was explained, the combination of the temporary stop symbol does not include the reach symbol (that is, the left symbol and The right symbol is not common), and it may be possible to temporarily stop without passing through the reach state. For example, after different symbols are stopped as the left symbol and the right symbol, the pseudo continuous symbol may be stopped as the middle symbol so that the temporary stop (and the subsequent re-variation) may be made. Further, in the case of one variation pattern, the temporary stop may occur after the reach state and the temporary stop may occur without the reach state. As described above, in the case of temporary stop without passing through the reach state, it is preferable to provide an effect mode that suggests only the pseudo run symbol without suggesting the reach symbol in the symbol pre-reading notice.

  (23) In the above embodiment, an example was described in which a reach state is always established after a predetermined number of temporary stops have been performed in a fluctuation pattern involving pseudo-trains, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. There may be a fluctuation pattern in which the reach state is not established after the temporary stop. In addition, when the temporary stop is performed a predetermined number of times or more (for example, two or more times), the reach state may be established without fail.

  (24) In the above embodiment, an example is described in which the display mode of the suspension display in the symbol pre-reading notice suggests at least two symbols of the left symbol and the right symbol (providing the reach symbol), but in such a form The display mode of the suspension display in the symbol pre-reading notice is not limited as long as it at least suggests one of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol.

  (25) In the above embodiment, an example is described where the reach symbol is always suggested when the pseudo-connected symbol is suggested in the symbol pre-reading notice, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the reach symbol is suggested It may be possible to suggest a pseudo continuous pattern without being distracted. For example, only the pseudo run symbol may be suggested by the display mode of the hold display in which the left display information, the middle display information, and the right display information are a combination of “?” “NEXT” “?” “NEXT” and “?” May be used to indicate a left symbol and a pseudo run symbol depending on the display mode of the hold display.

  (26) In the above embodiment, an example was described in which the reach symbol constituting the final stop symbol (derived display result) and the reach symbol constituting the temporary stop symbol are common in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-series effect. Not limited to such a form, the reach symbol that constitutes the final stop symbol (the result of the derived display) may be different from the reach symbol that constitutes the temporary stop symbol. In the case of such a form, in the symbol pre-reading notice, the reach symbol which constitutes the temporary stop symbol may be suggested, and the reach symbol which constitutes the final stop symbol (derived display result) is suggested. It is good.

  (27) In the above embodiment, the pending display changes to the second pattern (eg "7" "NEXT" "7") through the first pattern (eg "7" "?" "7") In the change from the symbol first aspect to the symbol second aspect, an example in which the aspect (reach symbol suggestion aspect) of left display information and right display information is maintained has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the change from the mode to the symbol second mode, the mode of the left display information and the right display information (the reach symbol suggesting mode) may be changed. For example, the symbol display 1 may be changed from a symbol first mode in which the hold display is a combination of "7" "?" "7" to a symbol second mode in which "?" "NEXT" "?" According to this, it becomes possible to give notice of the symbol displayed at the temporary stop timing in the fluctuation pattern which becomes temporary stop without being accompanied by the reach state.

  (28) In the above embodiment, the display modes of left display information, middle display information and right display information constituting the hold display are respectively left symbol display area 9L, middle symbol display area 9C and right symbol display area 9R. An example of changing to the form of the effect pattern displayed at a predetermined timing (the reach state establishment timing, the temporary stop timing, the derivation timing of the final display result, etc.) has been described. It is good as long as it is possible to suggest an effect pattern according to the display mode of, for example, the left display information, the middle display information, and the right display information constituting the hold display are combinations of “?” “○ (red)” “?” By becoming, it may be made to suggest that a false continuation symbol temporarily stops in middle symbol display area 9C. Thus, "indicating the effect pattern" is not limited to the case of directly displaying the aspect of the effect pattern itself, but indirectly implies by some aspect such as color, shape, size, etc. Including.

  (29) In the above embodiment, for example, the timing at which the symbol pre-reading notice is executed, that is, the timing at which the display mode of the suspension display is changed, is an example in which the variation display of the effect symbol (special symbol) is performed. Although it has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the symbol prefetching notice is executed within the period controlled to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) or within the period when fanfare effect or ending effect is being executed It is good.

  (30) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, when the pending display corresponding to the variable display serving as the target of the symbol pre-reading effect is changed to the first pattern pattern or the second pattern pattern About the example which suggests the pattern by which temporary stop or stop display is carried out in the change display corresponding to the said pending display while making it easy to understand the display mode before and after the occurrence of the change and the change by executing a predetermined effect (firework effect) Although explained, for example, the display mode of the suspension display does not change from the symbol target mode (“?” “?” “?”) (That is, remains in a mode not suggesting the design), the variation corresponding to the suspension display An effect form may be provided such that the display is started. In the case where such an effect mode is provided, a predetermined symbol in the variable display is displayed after the variable display is started (during execution of the variable display) although the symbol itself is the target of the symbol pre-reading notice but is not suggested It is also possible to give notice of a symbol (stop symbol or temporary stop symbol) displayed at the timing of. For example, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, left display information “?”, Middle display information “?”, And right display information constituting the pending display corresponding to the variable display at the timing when the variable display is started. The display information “?” Is filled in the left cylinder, the middle cylinder, and the right cylinder and launched, and the fireworks are opened and displayed in the left symbol display area 9L, the middle symbol display area 9C, and the right symbol display area 9R May be suggested. That is, the symbol displayed in the variable display may be notified in advance at a timing after the variable display not indicating the symbol is started.

  And when such a production mode (pattern notice after the start of fluctuation display) is provided, for example, in one or more of left display information, middle display information, and right display information constituting the hold display Although not an aspect, you may make it provide the thing (for example, "(circle) (red)) which makes it expect that a pseudo | simulation continuous symbol will stop temporarily, for example. For example, when the combination of left display information, middle display information, and right display information is “?” “○ (red)” “?”, The middle display information “o (red)” is filled in the middle cylinder. It may be launched and fireworks may open at a high rate, and "o (red)" may be changed to "NEXT". Further, among the left display information, the middle display information, and the right display information, display information whose size is larger than that of other display information may be changed more easily than the other display information.

  (31) In the above embodiment, an example is described in which re-variation is executed by temporarily stopping the pseudo-connected symbol, but the effect symbol (for example, “ A combination (for example, a combination of “1”, “1”, and “2”) consisting only of “1” to “9”) may be used. Further, in the above embodiment, in the variation pattern of 1, the effect pattern to be temporarily stopped with the pseudo continuous symbol does not change (for example, in the case of “7” “NEXT” “7” in the first temporary stop, In the second temporary stop and the third temporary stop, a common combination is described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, but in one variation pattern, the effect pattern to be temporarily stopped with the pseudo run pattern changes (For example, if it is "6" "NEXT" "6" in the first temporary stop, it may become "7" "NEXT" "7" in the second temporary stop or the third temporary stop) You may do so. In addition, the production design which is temporarily stopped with the pseudo consecutive design is not limited to the reach design (for example “7” “NEXT” “7” case) where the left design and the right design are common, but non reach design (for example “6”) The case of “NEXT” or “1” may be used. In addition, the combination of the effect symbols described above may be mixed in a plurality of temporary stops in one variation pattern, and for example, the combination of chances of “1”, “1” and “2” is the first temporary stop. Temporary stop, "6" "NEXT" "1" of non-reach mode including pseudo run symbol is temporarily stopped at the second temporary stop, and "7" reach mode including the pseudo run symbol at the third temporary stop "NEXT" and "7" may be temporarily stopped.

  In this embodiment, in the first look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display is displayed in the special mode is changed from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other timing may be included. For example, any timing until the start of the variable display of the advance object (specifically, a period during one change display or a plurality of change displays executed before the start of the variable display of the advance object) The hold display may be displayed in a special mode.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the timing at which the hold display is displayed in the special mode in the second pre-reading effect pattern is only the timing of the start winning combination, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be displayed and changed to a special mode at any shift timing to be displayed, or any timing until the change display of the notice target is started (specifically, the change display of the notice target is started The hold display may be displayed in a special manner in one variable display or a period of time over a plurality of variable displays) which is executed until it is executed. Further, in the second pre-reading effect pattern, the timing at which the suspension display displayed in the special mode changes to the special mode is not limited to the shift timing, and the suspension display is displayed in the special mode, and then the variable display of the advance notice target is displayed. It may be any timing until the start (specifically, a period during one variable display or a plurality of variable displays which is executed before the start of the variable display of the preview object).

  Further, in this embodiment, as the effect pattern of the pre-reading effect, the first special mode of the final display mode without temporarily displaying the suspension display corresponding to the variable display (pending information) to be the advance notice is displayed in the special mode. Alternatively, the first pre-reading effect pattern displayed in the second special mode and the suspension display corresponding to the variable display (pending information) to be notified in advance at the timing of the start winning will be displayed in a special mode, and the final display at any shift timing Although it includes the second pre-reading effect pattern displayed in the first special aspect or the second special aspect of the aspect, only the second pre-reading effect pattern may be included. Even in this case, when the pre-reading effect is performed, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified is temporarily displayed in the special mode, but from the special mode to the special mode, a plurality of timings Because it is changed at any timing (such as shift timing), it is possible to provide diversity in the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display, and to improve the game interest.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the hold display is always displayed changing from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. You may not change it as it is. In this case, when the hold indication is not changed from the special mode to the special mode, and the variable display corresponding to the hold indication (hold information) is started, the change is made from the special mode to the special mode. It is desirable to configure so that the rate of big hit is low. By doing this, it is possible to be more interested in changing the display mode of the hold display from the special mode to the special mode. Also, in this case, the state in which the hold display is displayed in the special mode is configured to be changed to the special mode and to be displayed at a higher rate than the state in which the hold display is displayed in the normal state. It is desirable to do. By doing this, it is possible to give an interest in changing the display mode of the hold display from the normal mode to the special mode, and it is also possible to enhance expectation when displayed in the special mode. .

  In addition, in this embodiment, predetermined display control is performed in the effect display device 9 as a suggested effect, but along with this (or in place of this), an effect for outputting sound from a speaker or lighting a lamp You may be made to perform an effect etc. Further, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect is an effect (an arrow pierces (or passes)) acting on a change in the hold display, and the hold display changes according to the result of the show (when the arrow pierces, the hold is held The display does not have to be the effect of acting on the change of the hold display). For example, even if the display mode of the hold display is changed or not changed, an effect of sticking an arrow to a specific hold display is performed as a suggestive effect. And when changing a pending | holding display, you may make it not change the pending | holding display which the arrow pierced by suggestion effect, when changing the pending | holding display which the arrow pierced by suggestion effect. That is, although the mode of the suggestion effect (the flying arrow sticks to a specific hold display) is the same as when the hold display changes and when it does not change, the result (the display mode of the hold display with the arrow stuck is It may be made to perform a pending change presentation which changes whether or not it changes.

  In the above embodiment, “the proportions are different” means not only those having different proportions such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 40%: 60%. A: B = 100%: 0% is a concept that includes different proportions (ie, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits the command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to another board (for example, FIG. 3). (Sound / lamp board) having a function by the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 or the sound output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35 or the like and a function by the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35 The control command may be transmitted, and may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control substrate 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35 and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. According to the above, the control relating to voice control and lamp control is executed, and further, the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 It may be sent to the Even in that case, the sound control board 100 and the lamp driver are similar to the display control according to the play control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the substrate 35 or the sound / lamp substrate.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the variation is started in order to notify the microcomputer for effect control 100 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of pseudo link 1 Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect (if it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called It is also possible to transmit a command indicating the fluctuation time or the fluctuation mode) after (2) stop. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variable display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. May be When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can also be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

  Further, the configuration described in the above embodiment can be applied not only to pachinko gaming machines but also to various types of gaming machines. For example, the configuration shown in each of the above embodiments may be applied to an enclosed circulation type pachinko machine. In the enclosed circulation type pachinko machine, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of game balls used in the pachinko machine are enclosed in the enclosed area (e.g., in the pachinko machine), and the gaming area provided in the pachinko machine To play the game balls through the game area, collect the game balls through the collecting unit (for example, each winning opening, out port, far ball return port), and discharge the collected game balls to the game area again. Circulate in the enclosed area. In addition, in such an enclosed circulation type pachinko machine, when there is a winning on each winning opening, points corresponding to the number of winning balls are added to the card inserted in the card unit instead of the winning balls. Processing is performed.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a game machine, but according to the present invention, a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of game machines are operated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. The symbol is rotated, and when the symbol is stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, the predetermined number of medals are applied to the slot machine to be paid out to the player when the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination. It is also possible.

  The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, and is particularly suitable for gaming machines provided with a plurality of variable display means, in which variable display is not simultaneously executed in those variable display means. Applied.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd start winning opening 20 special variable winning ball device 31 game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Microcomputer for game control 80 Effect control board 100 Microcomputer for effect control 101 CPU for effect control
109 VDP

Claims (2)

Based on the establishment of the start condition after the game medium passes through the start area provided in the game area, the variable display of the plurality of types of identification information is performed in the plurality of variable display areas, and the display is performed in the plurality of variable display areas. A gaming machine that controls an advantageous state for the player when the combination of identification information obtained is a predetermined specific display result,
The game apparatus further comprises a hold storage unit capable of storing data as a hold storage for determining whether or not to set the specific display result when game media passes through the start area.
The identification information displayed in at least one variable display area of the plurality of variable display areas at a specific timing during variable display corresponding to the hold storage, rather than when variable display corresponding to the hold storage is started Perform the suggested renditions suggested before,
After the suggestion effect is performed and before the variable display corresponding to the retention memory of the suggestion object of the suggestion effect is started , the aspect of the suggestion effect is displayed without fluctuating the indication effect. der possible to change the identification information indicated by the indicating effect by altering is,
The mode of the indication effect includes the special mode which suggests both that the display mode of the variable display becomes the reach mode and that the re-variable display is performed in which the variable display is performed again after temporary stop of the variable display. ,
It is possible to execute a notice effect for giving notice that the identification information suggested by the indication effect is changed, and when the notice effect is executed in the first mode, the notice effect is executed in the second mode A gaming machine characterized in that the rate at which the identification information suggested by the suggestion effect is changed is different from time to time. Based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied after the game medium passes through the start area provided in the game area, the variable display of the plurality of types of normal identification information is performed in the plurality of variable display areas. A gaming machine that controls an advantageous state advantageous to a player when a combination of normal identification information to be displayed results in a predetermined specific display result,
The game apparatus further comprises a hold storage unit capable of storing data as a hold storage for determining whether or not to set the specific display result when game media passes through the start area.
Either the normal identification information or identification information including special identification information different from the normal identification information is displayed in at least one of the plurality of variable display areas.
The identification information displayed in at least one variable display area of the plurality of variable display areas at a specific timing during variable display corresponding to the hold storage, rather than when variable display corresponding to the hold storage is started Perform the suggested renditions suggested before,
After the suggestion effect is performed and before the variable display corresponding to the retention memory of the suggestion object of the suggestion effect is started , the aspect of the suggestion effect is displayed without fluctuating the indication effect. der possible to change the identification information indicated by the indicating effect by altering is,
The mode of the indication effect includes the special mode which suggests both that the display mode of the variable display becomes the reach mode and that the re-variable display is performed in which the variable display is performed again after temporary stop of the variable display. ,
It is possible to execute a notice effect for giving notice that the identification information suggested by the indication effect is changed, and when the notice effect is executed in the first mode, the notice effect is executed in the second mode A gaming machine characterized in that the rate at which the identification information suggested by the suggestion effect is changed is different from time to time.